Post on 01-Oct-2020
VOLVO C30
Owners Manual Web Edition
DEAR VOLVO OWNERTHANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO
We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo.The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and yourpassengers. Volvo is one of the safest cars in the world. Your Volvohas also been designed to satisfy all current safety and environmentalrequirements.
In order to increase your enjoyment of the car, we recommend thatyou familiarise yourself with the equipment, instructions and mainte-nance information contained in this owner's manual.
Table of contents
2 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
0000 Introduction
Important information................................. 8Volvo and the environment....................... 12
0101 Safety
Seatbelts................................................... 16Airbag system........................................... 19Airbags...................................................... 20Activating/deactivating the airbag*........... 22Side airbags (SIPS bags).......................... 24Inflatable Curtain (IC)................................ 26WHIPS....................................................... 27When the systems deploy......................... 29Crash mode.............................................. 30Child safety............................................... 31 02
02 Instruments and controls
Overview, left-hand drive cars.................. 44Overview, right-hand drive cars................ 46Driver's door control panel....................... 48Combined instrument panel...................... 49Indicator and warning symbols................. 50Information display................................... 54Electrical socket........................................ 56Lighting panel........................................... 58Left-hand stalk switch............................... 62Right-hand stalk switch............................ 65Cruise control*.......................................... 68Keypad in the steering wheel*.................. 70Steering wheel adjustment, hazard warn-ing flashers................................................ 71Parking brake............................................ 72Power windows......................................... 73Windows, rearview and door mirrors........ 75Power sunroof* ........................................ 79Personal preferences................................ 81
HomeLink *.............................................. 84
Table of contents
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 3
0303 Climate control
General information on climate control..... 90Manual climate control, AC....................... 92Electronic climate control, ECC*............... 95Air distribution........................................... 98Fuel-driven engine block heater and pas-senger compartment heater*.................... 99Fuel-driven auxiliary heater* (diesel)....... 102
0404 Interior
Front seats.............................................. 106Interior lighting........................................ 111Storage spaces in the passenger com-partment.................................................. 114Rear seat................................................. 118Cargo area.............................................. 120
0505 Locks and alarm
Remote control key with key blade......... 126Active locks............................................. 129Keyless drive*.......................................... 130Battery in remote control key.................. 133Locking and unlocking............................ 134Alarm*..................................................... 137
Table of contents
4 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
0606 Starting and driving
General.................................................... 142Refuelling................................................ 144Alcolock*................................................. 148Starting the engine.................................. 152Starting the engine – Flexifuel................. 154Keyless drive*.......................................... 156Manual gearbox...................................... 157Automatic gearbox.................................. 158DRIVe Start-Stop*................................... 163Brake system.......................................... 167DSTC – Stability and traction control sys-tem*......................................................... 169Park Assist*............................................. 171BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System. . 173Towing and recovery.............................. 176Start assistance...................................... 180Driving with a trailer................................ 181Towing equipment*................................. 183Detachable towbar* ............................... 185Loading................................................... 189Adjusting headlamp pattern.................... 190
0707 Wheels and tyres
General.................................................... 194Tyre pressure.......................................... 198Warning triangle* and spare wheel * ...... 199Changing wheels.................................... 201Emergency puncture repair*................... 203
0808 Car care
Cleaning.................................................. 210Touching up paintwork........................... 214Rustproofing........................................... 215
Table of contents
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 5
0909 Maintenance and service
Volvo service........................................... 218Self-maintenance.................................... 219Bonnet and engine compartment........... 220Oils and fluids......................................... 222Wiper blades........................................... 228Battery..................................................... 230Replacing bulbs...................................... 234Fuses...................................................... 240 10
10 Infotainment system
General.................................................... 250Audio functions....................................... 252Radio functions....................................... 257CD functions........................................... 262Menu structure – audio system.............. 265Phone functions*..................................... 266Menu structure – phone*......................... 273Bluetooth handsfree*.............................. 276 11
11 Specifications
Type designation..................................... 284Dimensions and weights......................... 286Engine specifications.............................. 289Engine oil................................................ 290Fluids and lubricants............................... 292Fuel......................................................... 295Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pres-sure ........................................................ 298Electrical system..................................... 300Type approval......................................... 302Symbols in the display............................ 303
Table of contents
6
1212 Alphabetical Index
Alphabetical Index.................................. 306
Table of contents
7
Introduction
Important information
8 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Reading the Owner's Manual
Introduction
A good way of getting to know your new car isto read the owner's manual, ideally before yourfirst journey. This will give you the opportunityto familiarise yourself with new functions, tosee how best to handle the car in different sit-uations, and to make the best use of all thecar's features. Please pay attention to thesafety instructions contained in the manual.
The specifications, design features and illus-trations in this owner's manual are not binding.We reserve the right to make modificationswithout prior notice.© Volvo Car Corporation
Option
All types of option/accessory are marked withan asterisk*.
In addition to standard equipment, this manualalso describes options (factory fitted equip-ment) and certain accessories (retrofitted extraequipment).
The equipment described in the owner's man-ual is not available in all cars - they have dif-ferent equipment depending on adaptationsfor the needs of different markets and nationalor local laws and regulations.
In the event of uncertainty over what is stand-ard or an option/accessory, contact a Volvodealer.
Special texts
WARNING
Warning texts advise of a risk of personalinjury.
IMPORTANT
Important texts advise of a risk of materialdamage.
NOTE
NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitatethe use of features and functions for exam-ple.
Footnote
There is footnote information in the owner'smanual that is located at the bottom of thepage. This information is an addition to the textthat it refers to via a number. If the footnoterefers to text in a table then letters are usedinstead of numbers for referral.
Message texts
There are displays in the car that show textmessages. These text messages are high-
lighted in the owner's manual by means of thetext being slightly larger and printed in grey.Examples of this are in menu texts and mes-sage texts on the information display (e.g.AUDIO SETTINGS).
Decals
The car contains different types of decal whichare designed to convey important informationin a simple and clear manner. The decals in thecar have the following descending degree ofimportance for the warning/information.
Warning for personal injury
G031590
Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field,white text/image on black message field. Usedto indicate the presence of danger which, if the
Introduction
Important information
9
warning is ignored, may result in serious per-sonal injury or fatality.
Risk of property damage
G031592
White ISO symbols and white text/image onblack or blue warning field and message field.Used to indicate the presence of danger which,if the warning is ignored, may result in damageto property.
Information
G031593
White ISO symbols and white text/image onblack message field.
NOTE
The labels shown in the owner's manual arenot provided as exact reproductions ofthose in the car. The purpose is to showtheir approximate appearance and locationin the car. The information that applies toyour car in particular is available on the labelin question in your car.
Procedure lists
Procedures where action must be taken in acertain sequence are numbered in the owner'smanual.
When there is a series of illustrations forstep-by-step instructions each step isnumbered in the same way as the corres-ponding illustration.
There are numbered lists with letters adja-cent to the series of illustrations where theorder of the instructions is not significant.
Arrows appear numbered and unnum-bered and are used to illustrate a move-ment.
If there is no series of illustrations for step-by-step instructions then the different steps arenumbered with normal numbers.
Position lists
Red circles containing a number are usedin overview images where different com-ponents are pointed out. The numberrecurs in the position list featured in con-nection with the illustration that describesthe item.
Bulleted lists
A bulleted list is used when there is a list ofpoints in the owner's manual.
Example:
Introduction
Important information
10 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
• Coolant
• Engine oil
To be continued
��� This symbol is located furthest down to theright when a section continues on the followingpage.
Recording data
Your vehicle contains a number of computerswhose function is to continuously check andmonitor the vehicle's operation and function-ality. Some of the computers can record infor-mation during normal driving if they detect anerror. In addition, information is recorded in theevent of a crash or incident. Parts of the recor-ded information are required so that techni-cians can diagnose and rectify faults in thevehicle during servicing and maintenance andso that Volvo can fulfil legal requirements andother regulations. In addition to this, the infor-mation is used for research purposes by Volvoin order to continually develop quality andsafety, as the information can contribute to abetter understanding of the factors that causeaccidents and injuries. The informationincludes details of the status and functionalityof various systems and modules in the vehiclewith regard to engine, throttle, steering andbrake systems, amongst other things. Thisinformation may include details regarding the
way the driver drives the vehicle, such as vehi-cle speed, brake and accelerator pedal use,steering wheel movement and whether or notthe driver and passengers have used theirseatbelts. For the reasons given this informa-tion may be stored in the vehicle's computersfor a certain length of time, but also as a resultof a collision or incident. This information maybe stored by Volvo as long as it can help tofurther develop and further enhance safety andquality and as long as there are legal require-ments and other regulations that Volvo needsto consider.
Volvo will not contribute to the above-descri-bed information being disclosed to third partieswithout the vehicle owner's consent. However,due to national legislation and regulationsVolvo may be required to disclose such infor-mation to authorities such as police authorities,or others who may assert a legal right to haveaccess to it.
To be able to read and interpret the informationrecorded by the computers in the vehiclerequires special technical equipment thatVolvo, and workshops that have entered intoagreements with Volvo, have access to. Volvois responsible that the information, which istransferred to Volvo during servicing and main-tenance, is stored and handled in a securemanner and that the handling complies with
applicable legal requirements. For further infor-mation - contact a Volvo dealer.
Accessories and extra equipment
The incorrect connection and installation ofaccessories can negatively affect the car'selectrical system. Certain accessories onlyfunction when their associated software isinstalled in the car's computer system. Wetherefore recommend that you always contactan authorised Volvo workshop before installingaccessories which are connected to or affectthe electrical system.
Change of ownership for cars withVolvo On Call *
Volvo On Call is a supplemental service thatconsists of safety, security and comfort serv-ices. If the car has Volvo On Call and there is achange of owner, it is very important that theseservices are discontinued so that the formerowner cannot access the services in the car.Contact the call centre by pressing the ON
CALL button in the car or contact an author-ised Volvo workshop. See also "Changing thesecurity code" in the owner's manual for VolvoOn Call.
Introduction
Important information
11
Information on the Internet
At www.volvocars.com there is further infor-mation concerning your car.
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
12 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy
G000000
Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corpo-ration's core values which influence all opera-tions. We also believe that our customers shareour consideration for the environment.
Your Volvo complies with strict internationalenvironmental standards and is also manufac-tured in one of the cleanest and most resource-efficient plants in the world. Volvo Car Corpo-ration has global ISO certification, whichincludes the environmental standard ISO14001 covering all factories and several of ourother units. We also set requirements for ourpartners so that they work systematically withenvironmental issues.
Fuel consumption
Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumptionin each of their respective classes. Lower fuelconsumption generally results in lower emis-sion of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.
It is possible for the driver to influence fuel con-sumption. For more information read under theheading, Reducing environmental impact.
Efficient emission control
Your Volvo is manufactured following the con-cept "Clean inside and out" – a concept thatencompasses a clean interior environment aswell as highly efficient emission control. In
many cases the exhaust emissions are wellbelow the applicable standards.
Clean air in the passenger compartment
A passenger compartment filter prevents dustand pollen from entering the passenger com-partment via the air intake.
A sophisticated air quality system, IAQS* (Inte-rior Air Quality System) ensures that the incom-ing air is cleaner than the air in the traffic out-side.
The system consists of an electronic sensorand a carbon filter. The incoming air is moni-tored continuously and if there is an increase in
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 13
the level of certain unhealthy gases such ascarbon monoxide then the air intake is closed.Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic,queues and tunnels for example.
The entry of nitrous oxides, ground-level ozoneand hydrocarbons is prevented by the carbonfilter.
Interior
The interior of a Volvo is designed to be plea-sant and comfortable, even for people withcontact allergies and for asthma sufferers.Extreme attention has been given to choosingenvironmentally-compatible materials.
Volvo workshops and the environment
Regular maintenance creates the conditionsfor a long service life and low fuel consumptionfor your car. In this way you contribute to acleaner environment. When Volvo's workshopsare entrusted with the service and mainte-nance of your car it becomes part of our sys-tem. We make clear demands regarding theway in which our workshops are designed inorder to prevent spills and discharges into theenvironment. Our workshop staff have theknowledge and the tools required to guaranteegood environmental care.
Reducing environmental impact
You can easily help reduce environmentalimpact - here are a few tips:
• Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off theengine when stationary for longer periods.Pay attention to local regulations.
• Drive economically - think ahead.
• Perform service and maintenance inaccordance with the owner's manual'sinstructions - follow the Service and War-ranty Booklet's recommended intervals.
• If the car is equipped with an engine blockheater*, use it before starting from cold - itimproves starting capacity and reduceswear in cold weather and the engine rea-ches normal operating temperature morequickly, which lowers consumption andreduces emissions.
• High speed increases consumption con-siderably due to increased wind resistance- a doubling of speed increases wind resis-tance 4 times.
• Always dispose of environmentally hazar-dous waste, such as batteries and oils, inan environmentally safe manner. Consult aworkshop in the event of uncertainty abouthow this type of waste should be discarded- an authorised Volvo workshop is recom-mended.
Following this advice can save money, theplanet's resources are saved, and the car'sdurability is extended. For more informationand further advice, see the pages 142 and295.
Recycling
As a part of Volvo's environmental work, it isimportant that the car is recycled in an envi-ronmentally sound manner. Almost all of thecar can be recycled. The last owner of the caris therefore requested to contact a dealer forreferral to a certified/approved recyclingfacility.
The owner's manual and theenvironment
The Forest Stewardship Council symbolshows that the paper pulp in this publicationcomes from FSC certified forests or othercontrolled sources.
14 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Seatbelts................................................................................................. 16Airbag system......................................................................................... 19Airbags.................................................................................................... 20Activating/deactivating the airbag*......................................................... 22Side airbags (SIPS bags)........................................................................ 24Inflatable Curtain (IC).............................................................................. 26WHIPS..................................................................................................... 27When the systems deploy....................................................................... 29Crash mode............................................................................................ 30Child safety............................................................................................. 31
SAFETY
01 Safety
Seatbelts 01
16
General information
G020104
Tensioning the hip strap. The belt must be posi-tioned low down.
Heavy braking can have serious consequencesif the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that allpassengers use their seatbelts. It is importantthat the seatbelt lies against the body so it canprovide maximum protection. Do not lean thebackrest too far back. The seatbelt is designedto protect in a normal seating position.
Putting on a seatbelt
– Pull the seatbelt out slowly and secure it bypressing the buckle into the lock. A loud"click" indicates that the seatbelt haslocked.
Releasing the seatbelt
– Press the red lock button and then let theseatbelt retract. If the seatbelt does notretract fully, feed the seatbelt in by hand sothat it does not hang loose.
The seatbelt locks and cannot be with-
drawn:
• if it is pulled out too quickly
• during braking and acceleration
• if the car leans heavily.
Keep in mind the following
• do not use clips or anything else that canprevent the seatbelt from fitting properly
• ensure that the seatbelt is not twisted orcaught on anything
• the hip strap must be positioned low down(not over the abdomen)
• tension the hip strap over the lap by pullingthe diagonal shoulder belt as illustrated.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat-belt is not used or is used incorrectly, thismay diminish the protection provided by theairbag in the event of a collision.
WARNING
Each seatbelt is designed for only one per-son.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seatbelt yourself.Volvo recommends that you contact anauthorised Volvo workshop. If the seatbelthas been subjected to a major load, such asin conjunction with a collision, the entireseatbelt must be replaced. Some of theseatbelt's protective properties may havebeen lost even if the seatbelt does notappear damaged. The seatbelt must also bereplaced if it shows signs of wear or dam-age. The new seatbelt must be type-approved and designed for installation atthe same location as the replaced seatbelt.
WARNING
The rear seat is designed for a maximum oftwo passengers.
01 Safety
Seatbelts 01
��
17
Seatbelts and pregnancy
G020105
The seatbelt should always be worn duringpregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in thecorrect way. The diagonal section of the seat-belt should wrap over the shoulder then berouted between the breasts and to the side ofthe abdomen.
The lap section of the seatbelt should lay flatover the thighs and as low as possible underthe abdomen. – It must never be allowed to rideupward. Remove the slack from the seatbeltand ensure that it fits as close to the body aspossible. In addition, check that there are notwists in the seatbelt.
As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant driversshould adjust their seats and steering wheel
such that they can easily maintain control of thevehicle as they drive (which means that theymust be able to easily operate the foot pedalsand steering wheel). They should strive to posi-tion the seat with as large a distance as possi-ble between their abdomen and the steeringwheel.
Seatbelt reminder
G018084
Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fastentheir seatbelts by means of an audio and visualreminder. The audio reminder is speeddependent, and in some cases time depend-ent. The visual reminder is located in the roofconsole and the combined instrument panel.
Child seats are not covered by the seatbeltreminder system.
Rear seat
The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has twosubfunctions:
• Provides information on which seatbeltsare being used in the rear seat. A messageis shown in the information display whenthe seatbelts are used. The message iscleared automatically after driving forapproximately 30 seconds or after press-ing the indicator stalk's READ button.
• Provides a warning if one of the rear seat-belts is unfastened during a journey. Thiswarning takes the form of a message onthe information display along with theaudio/visual signal. The warning ceaseswhen the seatbelt is re-fastened or whenacknowledged manually by pressing theREAD button.
The message on the information display show-ing which seatbelts are in use is always avail-able. Press the READ button to see storedmessages.
Certain markets
An audio signal and indicator lamp remind thedriver if not wearing a seatbelt to use one. Atlow speed, the audio reminder will sound forthe first 6 seconds.
01 Safety
Seatbelts 01
18
Seatbelt tensioner
All the seatbelts are equipped with seatbelttensioners. A mechanism in the seatbelt ten-sioner tightens the seatbelt in the event of asufficiently violent collision. The seatbelt thenprovides more effective restraint for occu-pants.
WARNING
Never insert the tongue of the passenger'sseatbelt into the buckle on the driver's side.Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt intothe buckle on the correct side. Do not makeany damages on seatbelts nor insert anyforeign objects into a buckle. The seatbeltsand buckles would then possibly not func-tion as intended in the event of a collision.There is a risk of serous injury.
Seatbelt guide
G020106
The seatbelt guide is fitted on both the driver'sseat and passenger seat.
The seatbelt guide is an aid for providing betteraccess to the seatbelt. When getting into andout of the rear seat, remove the seatbelt fromthe seatbelt guide and position it furthest backon the seatbelt bar. Refit the seatbelt into theseatbelt guide afterwards.
01 Safety
Airbag system 01
19
Warning symbol on the combinedinstrument panel
The warning symbol in the combined instru-ment panel illuminates when the remote con-trol key is turned to key position I, II or III. Thesymbol goes out after approx. 6 seconds pro-vided the airbag system is fault-free.
As well as the warning symbol, amessage may appear on the dis-play in appropriate cases. If thewarning symbol malfunctions, thewarning triangle illuminates andthe message SRS AIRBAG
SERVICE REQUIRED or SRS
AIRBAG SERVICE URGENT
appears in the display. Volvo rec-ommends that you contact an authorisedVolvo workshop immediately.
WARNING
If the warning symbol for the airbag systemremains illuminated or illuminates while driv-ing, it means that the airbag system doesnot have full functionality. The symbol indi-cates a fault in the seatbelt tensioner sys-tem, SIPS, SRS or the IC system. Volvo rec-ommends that you contact an authorisedVolvo workshop immediately.
01 Safety
Airbags 01
20
Airbag system
G020111
SRS system, left-hand drive
The system consists of airbags and sensors. Asufficiently violent collision trips the sensorsand the airbag(s) are inflated with hot gas. Tocushion the impact, the airbag deflates whencompressed. When this occurs, smokeescapes into the car. This is completely nor-mal. The entire process, including inflation anddeflation of the airbag, takes place withintenths of a second.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that you contact anauthorised Volvo workshop for repair.Defective work in the airbag system couldcause malfunction and result in serious per-sonal injury.
G020110
SRS system, right-hand drive
NOTE
The sensors react differently depending onthe course of the collision and whether ornot the seatbelts on the driver's side andpassenger side are used.
It is therefore possible that only one (ornone) of the airbags may inflate in a colli-sion. The airbag system senses the force ofthe collision on the car and adapts accord-ingly so that one or more airbags isdeployed.
The capacities of the airbags are also adap-ted to the collision force to which they aresubjected.
01 Safety
Airbags 01
21
G020113
Location of the passenger airbag in left-hand driveand right-hand drive cars.
WARNING
Do not put objects in front of or above theinstrument panel where the passenger air-bag is located.
Airbag on the driver's side
The car has an airbag to supplement the pro-tection afforded by the seatbelt on the driver'sside. It is folded up into the centre of the steer-ing wheel. The steering wheel is marked SRS
AIRBAG.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat-belt is not used or is used incorrectly, thismay diminish the protection provided by theairbag in the event of a collision.
Passenger airbag
The car has an airbag to supplement the pro-tection afforded by the seatbelt on the passen-ger side. It is folded up into a compartmentabove the glovebox. The cover panel is markedSRS AIRBAG.
WARNING
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbagdeploys, passengers must sit as upright aspossible with their feet on the floor and backagainst the backrest. Seatbelts must besecured.
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on abooster cushion in the front seat if the airbagis activated.1
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in frontof the front passenger seat. Children under140 cm must never sit in the front passengerseat if the airbag is activated.
Failure to follow the advice given above canendanger life.
1 For information on activated/deactivated airbag, see page 22.
01 Safety
Activating/deactivating the airbag* 01
22 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Key switch off - PACOS*
General information
The airbag for the front passenger seat can bedeactivated if the car is equipped with a switch,PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch). Forinformation on how to activate/deactivate, seeunder the heading Activating/deactivating.
Key switch off/switch
The switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS)is located on the passenger end of the instru-ment panel and is accessible when the pas-senger door is open, (see under the headingbelow, Activating/deactivating).
Check that the switch is in the required posi-tion. Volvo recommends that the key blade isused to change position.
For information on the key blade, seepage 127.
WARNING
Failure to follow the advice given above canendanger life.
WARNING
If the car is equipped with a front passengerairbag, but does not have a switch (PACOS),then the airbag will always be activated.
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on abooster cushion in the front seat if the airbagis activated and the symbol in the roofconsole is illuminated. Failure to follow thisadvice could endanger the life of the child.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to sit in the front pas-senger seat if the text message in the roofconsole indicates that the airbag is deacti-vated, and if the warning symbol for the air-bag system is also displayed on the com-bined instrument panel. This indicates thatthere has been a severe malfunction. Volvorecommends that you visit an authorisedVolvo workshop as soon as possible.
Activating/deactivating
Switch location
The airbag is activated. With the switch inthis position, children taller than 140 cmcan sit in the front passenger seat, butnever children in a child seat or on abooster cushion.
The airbag is deactivated. With the switchin this position, children in a child seat oron a booster cushion can sit in the frontpassenger seat, but never persons tallerthan 140 cm.
01 Safety
Activating/deactivating the airbag* 01
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 23
WARNING
Activated airbag (passenger seat):
Never place a child in a child seat or on abooster cushion on the front passenger seatwhen the airbag is activated. This applies toeveryone shorter than 140 cm.
Deactivated airbag (passenger seat):
No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit inthe front passenger seat when the airbag isdeactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above canendanger life.
Messages
2
G018082
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag isdeactivated.
A text message and a symbol in the roof con-sole indicate that the airbag for the front pas-senger seat is deactivated (see preceding illus-tration).
G018083
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag isactivated.
A warning symbol in the roof console indicatesthat the airbag for the front passenger seat isactivated (see preceding illustration).
NOTE
When the remote control key is turned tokey position II or III the warning symbol forthe airbag is displayed on the combinedinstrument panel for approx. 6 seconds, seepage 19.
Following which, the indicator in the roofconsole is illuminated showing the correctstatus for the front passenger seat airbag.For more information about the different keypositions, see page 152.
01 Safety
Side airbags (SIPS bags) 01
24
Side airbag
G020118
Side airbag locations.
In a side impact collision a large proportion ofthe collision force is transferred by the SIPS(Side Impact Protection System) to beams, pil-lars, the floor, the roof and other structuralparts of the body. The side airbags at the driv-er's and front passenger seats protect thechest area and are an important part of theSIPS. The side airbags are located in the frontseat backrests.
WARNING
• Volvo recommends that repairs are onlycarried out by an authorised Volvoworkshop. Defective work in the SIPS-bag system could cause malfunctionand result in serious personal injury.
• Do not place any objects in the areabetween the outside of the seat and thedoor panel, since this area is requiredby the side airbag.
• Volvo recommends the use only of carseat covers approved by Volvo. Otherseat covers may impede the operationof the side airbags.
• Side airbags are a supplement the seat-belts. Always use a seatbelt.
Child seats and side airbags
The protection provided by the car to childrenseated in a child seat or on a booster cushionis not diminished by the side airbag.
A child seat or booster cushion can be placedon the front passenger seat provided that thecar does not have an activated1 passenger air-bag.
Location
Driver's seat, left-hand drive.
1 For information on activated/deactivated airbag (SRS), see page 22.
01 Safety
Side airbags (SIPS bags) 01
25
Front passenger seat, left-hand drive.
The SIPS bag system consists of side airbagsand sensors. A sufficiently violent collision tripsthe sensors and the side airbags are inflated.The airbag inflates between the occupant andthe door panel and thereby cushions the initialimpact. The airbag deflates when compressedby the collision. The side airbag is normally onlydeployed on the side of the collision.
01 Safety
Inflatable Curtain (IC) 01
26
Properties
The inflatable curtain IC (Inflatable Curtain) is apart of SIPS and the airbags. It is fitted in theheadlining along both sides of the roof andprotects the car's occupants sitting in the outerseats. A sufficiently violent collision trips thesensors and the inflatable curtain is inflated.The inflatable curtain helps to prevent thedriver and passengers from striking their headson the inside of the car during a collision.
WARNING
Never hang or attach heavy items onto thehandles in the roof. The hook is onlydesigned for light clothing (not for solidobjects such as umbrellas for example).
Do not screw or install anything onto thecar's headlining, door pillars or side panels.This could compromise the intended pro-tection. Volvo recommends that you onlyever use Volvo genuine parts that areapproved for placement in these areas.
WARNING
Do not load the car higher than 50 mm under
the top edge of the side windows. Other-wise, the intended protection of the inflat-able curtain, which is concealed in the head-lining, may be compromised.
WARNING
The inflatable curtain is a supplement to theseatbelts.
Always use a seatbelt.
01 Safety
WHIPS 01
27
Protection against whiplash injury – WHIPS
G020347
The whiplash protection system (WHIPS) con-sists of energy absorbing backrests and spe-cially designed head restraints for the frontseats. The system is actuated by a rear-endcollision, where the angle and speed of the col-lision, and the nature of the colliding vehicle allhave an influence.
WARNING
The WHIPS system is a supplement to theseatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Properties of the seat
When the WHIPS system is deployed, the frontseat backrests are lowered backward to alterthe seating position of the driver and front seatpassenger. This reduces the risk of whiplashinjury.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPSsystem yourself. Volvo recommends thatyou contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
WHIPS system and child seats/booster
cushions
The protection provided by the car to childrenseated in a child seat or on a booster cushionis not diminished by the WHIPS system.
Correct seating position
For the best possible protection, the driver andfront seat passenger should sit in the centre ofthe seat with as little space as possiblebetween the head and the head restraint.
01 Safety
WHIPS 01
28
Do not obstruct the WHIPS system
G020125
Do not leave any objects on the floor behind thedriver's seat/passenger seat that may prevent theWHIPS system from functioning.
WARNING
Do not squeeze rigid objects between therear seat cushion and the front seat back-rest. Make sure you do not to obstruct thefunction of the WHIPS system.
G020126
Do not place objects in the rear seat that may pre-vent the WHIPS system from functioning.
WARNING
If a rear seat backrest is folded down, thecorresponding front seat must be movedforward so that it does not touch the foldedbackrest.
WARNING
If a seat has been subjected to extremeforces, such as due to a rear-end collision,the WHIPS system must be checked. Volvorecommends that it is checked by anauthorised Volvo workshop.
Part of the WHIPS system's protectivecapacity may have been lost even if theseats appear to be undamaged.
Volvo recommends that you contact anauthorised Volvo workshop to have the sys-tem checked even after a minor rear-endcollision.
01 Safety
When the systems deploy 01
29
Activating the systems
System Triggered
Seatbelt tensioner, front seat In a frontal collision and/or side-impact accident and/or rear-end collision
Seatbelt tensioner, outside rear seat In a frontal collision
Airbags In a frontal collisionA
Side airbags (SIPS) In a side-impact accidentA
Inflatable Curtain IC In a side-impact accidentA
Whiplash protection WHIPS In a rear-end collision
A The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a collision without airbag deployment. A number of factors such as the rigidity and weight of the object hit, the speed of the car, the angle ofthe collision etc. affects how the different safety systems of the car are activated.
If the airbags have been deployed, the follow-ing is recommended:
• Recovering the car. Volvo recommendsthat you have it conveyed to an authorisedVolvo workshop. Do not drive withdeployed airbags.
• Volvo recommends that you engage anauthorised Volvo workshop to handle thereplacement of components in the car'ssafety systems.
• Always contact a doctor.
NOTE
The airbag, SIPS, IC and belt tensioner sys-tems are deployed only once during a colli-sion
WARNING
The airbag system's control module islocated in the centre console. If the centreconsole is drenched with water or other liq-uid, disconnect the battery cables. Do notattempt to start the car since the airbagsmay deploy. Recovering the car. Volvo rec-ommends that you have it conveyed to anauthorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Never drive with deployed airbags. Theycan make steering difficult. Other safetysystems may also be damaged. The smokeand dust created when the airbags aredeployed can cause skin and eye irritation/injury after intensive exposure. In case ofirritation, wash with cold water. The rapiddeployment sequence and airbag fabricmay cause friction and skin burns.
01 Safety
Crash mode 01
30
Driving after a collision
G029042
If the car is involved in a collision, the textCRASH MODE SEE MANUAL may appear onthe information display. This means that the carhas reduced functionality. Crash mode is aprotective state that is enforced when the col-lision may have damaged any of the car's vitalfunctions, such as the fuel lines, sensors forone of the safety systems, or the brake system.
Attempting to start the car
First, check that no fuel is leaking from the car.There must be no smell of fuel either.
If everything seems normal and you havechecked for indications of fuel leakage, youmay attempt to start the car.
Firstly, remove the remote control key and thenreinsert it. The car's electronics will then try toreset themselves to normal mode. Then try tostart the car. If CRASH MODE SEE
MANUAL is still shown on the display then thecar must not be driven or towed. Even if the carappears to be driveable, hidden damage maymake the car impossible to control once mov-ing.
Moving the car
If NORMAL MODE is shown after CRASH
MODE SEE MANUAL has been reset, the carcan be moved carefully out of a dangerousposition. Do not move the car further than nec-essary.
WARNING
Never attempt to repair your car or reset theelectronics yourself if the car has been incrash mode. This could result in personalinjury or the car not functioning as normal.Volvo recommends that you always engagean authorised Volvo workshop to check andrestore the car to NORMAL MODE afterCRASH MODE SEE MANUAL has beendisplayed.
WARNING
Never, under any circumstances, attempt torestart the car if it smells of fuel when theCRASH MODE SEE MANUAL message isdisplayed. Leave the car at once.
WARNING
If the car is in crash mode it must not betowed. It must be transported from its loca-tion. Volvo recommends that you have itconveyed to an authorised Volvo workshop.
01 Safety
Child safety 01
31
Children should sit comfortably andsafely
Volvo recommends that children travel in rear-facing child seats until as late an age as pos-sible, at least until 3-4 years of age, and thenfront-facing booster cushions/child seats untilup to 10 years of age.
The position of a child in the car and the choiceof equipment are dictated by the child's weightand size, for more information, see page 33.
NOTE
Regulations regarding the placement ofchildren in cars vary from country to coun-try. Check what does apply.
Children of all ages and sizes must always sitcorrectly secured in the car. Never allow a childto sit on the knee of a passenger.
Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats,booster cushions & attachment devices) whichis designed for your particular car. Using Vol-vo's child safety equipment provides you withoptimum conditions for your child to travelsafely in the car. Furthermore, the child safetyequipment fits and is easy to use.
NOTE
In the event of questions when fitting childsafety products, contact the manufacturerfor clearer instructions.
Child seats
G020128
Child seats and airbags are not compatible.
NOTE
When using child safety products it isimportant to read the installation instruc-tions included with the product.
Do not attach the straps for the child seat tothe horizontal adjustment bar, springs, rails orbeams under the seat. Sharp edges can dam-age the straps.
Look in the installation instructions for the childseat for the correct fitting.
Location of child seats
You may place:
• a child seat/booster cushion on the frontpassenger seat, provided the passengerairbag is not activated1.
• one or more child seats/booster cushionsin the rear seat.
Always fit child seats/booster cushions in therear seat if the passenger airbag is activated. Achild in the front passenger seat could sufferserious injury if the airbag deploys.
1 For information on activated/deactivated airbag, see page 22.
01 Safety
Child safety 01
32
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on abooster cushion in the front seat if the airbagis activated2.
No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sitin the front passenger seat if the airbag isactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above canendanger life.
WARNING
Booster cushions/child seats with steelbraces or some other design that could reston the seatbelt buckle's opening buttonmust not be used, as they could cause theseatbelt buckle to open accidentally.
Do not allow the upper section of the childseat to rest against the windscreen.
Label Airbag
Label fitted on the end face of the instrument panelon the passenger side, see the illustration on page22.
2 For information on activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS), see page 22.
01 Safety
Child safety 01
��
33
Recommended child seats3
Weight Front seatA Rear seat
Group 0
max. 10 kg
Group 0+
max. 13 kg
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat,secured with the ISOFIX fixture system.
Type approval: E1 04301146
(L)
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat,secured with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E1 04301146
(U)
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat,secured with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E1 04301146
(U)
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat,secured with the car's seatbelt and straps. Use a protectivecushion between the child seat and the dashboard.
Type approval: E5 03135
(L)
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat,secured with the car's seatbelt, straps and support legs.
Type approval: E5 03135
(L)
Child seats which are universally approved.
(U)
Child seats which are universally approved.
(U)
3 With regard to other child seats the car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement.
01 Safety
Child safety 01
34
Weight Front seatA Rear seat
Group 1
9 – 18 kg
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible ChildSeat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbeltand straps.
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible ChildSeat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbeltand straps.B
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat,secured with the car's seatbelt and straps. Use a protectivecushion between the child seat and the dashboard.
Type approval: E5 03135
(L)
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat,secured with the car's seatbelt, straps and support legs.B
Type approval: E5 03135
(L)
Britax Fixway – rear-facing child seat, secured with the ISOFIXfixture system and straps.B
Type approval: E5 03171
(L)
Child seats which are universally approved.
(U)
Child seats which are universally approved.
(U)
01 Safety
Child safety 01
��
35
Weight Front seatA Rear seat
Group 2
15-25 kg
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible ChildSeat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbeltand straps.
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible ChildSeat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbeltand strapsB
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible ChildSeat) - front-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E5 04191
(L)
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible ChildSeat) - front-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E5 04191
(L)
01 Safety
Child safety 01
36
Weight Front seatA Rear seat
Group 2/3
15 – 36 kg
Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster Seat withbackrest).
Type approval: E1 04301169
(UF)
Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster Seat withbackrest).
Type approval: E1 04301169
(UF)
Booster cushion with and without backrest (Booster Cushionwith and without backrest).
Type approval: E5 03139
(UF)
Booster cushion with and without backrest (Booster Cushionwith and without backrest).
Type approval: E5 03139
(UF)
L: Suitable for specific child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories.
U: Suitable for universally approved child seats in this weight class.
UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats in this weight class.
A For information on activated/deactivated airbag, see page 22.B To install a rear-facing child seat in the rear seat, Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo dealer to have the mounting points installed.
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on abooster cushion in the front seat if the airbagis activated4.
No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sitin the front passenger seat if the airbag isactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above canendanger life.
4 For information on activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS), see page 22.
01 Safety
Child safety 01
37
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats
G009182
Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture systemare concealed behind the lower section of therear seat backrest, in the outer seats.
The location of the mounting points is indicatedby symbols in the backrest upholstery (seeillustration above).
Press the seat cushion down to access themounting points.
Always follow the manufacturer's installationinstructions when connecting a child seat tothe ISOFIX mounting points.
Size classes
Child seats are in different sizes – cars are indifferent sizes. This means that not all childseats are suitable for all seats in all car models.
Consequently, there is a size classification forchild seats using the ISOFIX fixture system inorder to assist users in choosing the correctchild seat (see the following table).
Sizeclass
Description
A Full size, front-facing childseat
B Reduced size (alt. 1), front-facing child seat
B1 Reduced size (alt.2), front-facing child seat
C Full size, rear-facing childseat
D Reduced size, rear-facingchild seat
E Rear-facing infant seat
Sizeclass
Description
F Transverse infant seat, left-hand
G Transverse infant seat, right-hand
WARNING
Never place a child in the passenger seat ifthe car is equipped with an activated airbag.
NOTE
If an ISOFIX child seat has no size classifi-cation then the car model must be includedon the child seat's vehicle list.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that you contact anauthorised Volvo dealer for recommenda-tions about which ISOFIX child seats Volvorecommends.
01 Safety
Child safety 01
38
Types of ISOFIX child seat
Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats
Front seat Outer rear seat
Infant seat transverse max. 10 kg F X X
G X X
Infant seat, rear-facing max. 10 kg E X OK
(IL)
Infant seat, rear-facing max. 13 kg E X OK
(IL)
D X OKA
(IL)
C X OKA
(IL)
Child seat, rear-facing 9-18 kg D X OKA
(IL)
C X OKA
(IL)
01 Safety
Child safety 01
��
39
Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats
Front seat Outer rear seat
Front-facing child seat 9-18 kg B X OKB
(IUF)
B1 X OKB
(IUF)
A X OKB
(IUF)
X: The ISOFIX position is not suitable for ISOFIX child seats in this weight class and/or size class.
IL: Suitable for specific ISOFIX child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories.
IUF: Suitable for front-facing ISOFIX child seats that are universally approved in this weight class.
A In order to be able to fit the infant/child seat in the rear seat, the front passenger seat has been adjusted to a location in front of centre position.B Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.
01 Safety
Child safety 01
40
Upper mounting points for child seats
G026316
Location, upper attachment points.
The car is equipped with upper mountingpoints for child seats. These mounting pointsare located on the rear side of the rear seat.
The upper mounting points are primarilyintended for use with front-facing child seats.Volvo recommends that small children shouldsit in rear-facing child seats to as late an ageas possible.
The child seat's straps must be routedbetween the head restraint and the backrest.
NOTE
For cars with folding head restraints on theoutside seats the head restraints should befolded to facilitate the installation of thistype of child seat.
NOTE
For cars equipped with a cargo area coverover the cargo area, this must be removedbefore a child seat can be fitted in themounting points.
For detailed information on how to secure thechild seat in the upper mounting points, referto the instructions from the child seat manu-facturer.
WARNING
The child seat's straps must always bedrawn through the hole in the head restraintleg before they are tensioned at the attach-ment point.
01 Safety
01
41
42 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Overview, left-hand drive cars................................................................ 44Overview, right-hand drive cars.............................................................. 46Driver's door control panel..................................................................... 48Combined instrument panel.................................................................... 49Indicator and warning symbols............................................................... 50Information display.................................................................................. 54Electrical socket...................................................................................... 56Lighting panel.......................................................................................... 58Left-hand stalk switch............................................................................. 62Right-hand stalk switch.......................................................................... 65Cruise control*........................................................................................ 68Keypad in the steering wheel*................................................................ 70Steering wheel adjustment, hazard warning flashers............................. 71Parking brake.......................................................................................... 72Power windows....................................................................................... 73Windows, rearview and door mirrors...................................................... 75Power sunroof* ...................................................................................... 79Personal preferences.............................................................................. 81
HomeLink *............................................................................................ 84
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
02 Instruments and controls
Overview, left-hand drive cars
02
44
02 Instruments and controls
Overview, left-hand drive cars
02
45
Steering wheel adjustment
Bonnet release
Control panel
Direction indicators, main beam, trip com-puter
Lighting, fuel filler flap opener
Door handle, lock button.
Air vents in dashboard
Air vent for side window
Cruise control
Horn, airbag
Combined instrument panel
Keypad for infotainment system
Windscreen wipers and washer, headlampwashers
Ignition switch
Sunroof controls
No function
No function
Switch for interior lighting
Reading lamp, left-hand side
Reading lamp, right-hand side
Seatbelt reminder and passenger seat air-bag indicator
Interior rearview mirror
Display for climate control and infotain-ment system
Infotainment system
Controls for climate control, infotainmentsystem and personal preferences
Climate control
Gear lever
Hazard warning flashers
Door handle
Glovebox
Parking brake
Electrical socket/cigarette lighter
Blind Spot Information System, BLIS
Switch, optional equipment
02 Instruments and controls
Overview, right-hand drive cars
02
46
02 Instruments and controls
Overview, right-hand drive cars
02
47
Electrical socket, cigarette lighter
Blind Spot Information System, BLIS
Switch, optional equipment
Parking brake
Control panel
Glovebox
Door handle
Air vent for side window
Air vents in dashboard
Gear lever
Climate control
Controls for climate control, infotainmentsystem and personal preferences
Infotainment system
Display for climate control and infotain-ment system
Interior rearview mirror
Seatbelt reminder and passenger seat air-bag indicator
Switch for interior lighting
Reading lamp, left-hand side
Reading lamp, right-hand side
No function
No function
Sunroof controls
Ignition switch
Windscreen wipers and washers, head-lamp washers
Cruise control
Combined instrument panel
Horn, airbag
Keypad for infotainment system
Hazard warning flashers
Door handle, lock button
Lighting, fuel filler flap opener
Direction indicators, main beam, trip com-puter
Bonnet release
Steering wheel adjustment
02 Instruments and controls
Driver's door control panel
02
48
Driver's door control panel
Power windows
Door mirror, left-hand side
Door mirrors, setting
Door mirror, right-hand side
02 Instruments and controls
Combined instrument panel
02
49
G02
9046
Speedometer.
Direction indicators, left.
Warning symbol.
Information display – Shows information orwarning messages, outside temperatureand clock. When the outside temperatureis between +2 °C to -5 °C a snowflake illu-minates on the display. This warns of icyroads. The outside temperature gaugemay show a slightly high reading after thecar has been stationary.
Information symbol.
Direction indicator, right.
Tachometer – Indicates engine speed inthousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).
Indicator and warning symbols.
Fuel gauge, see also trip computer, page 63.
Main beam indicator.
Display – Display for automatic gear posi-tion, rain sensor, odometer, trip meter andcruise control.
Also shows gear shift indicator (GSI) andgear positions in the D2 and DRIVe model,see page 157.
Button for trip meter – Used to measureshort distances. Short presses on the but-ton switches between the two trip metersT1 and T2. A long press (more than 2 sec-onds) resets an active trip meter to zero.
Temperature gauge - Used for the enginecooling system. A message will appear onthe display if the temperature becomes toohigh and the gauge goes into the red zone.Bear in mind that extra lights placed in frontof the air intake, for example, reduce thecooling capacity at high outside tempera-tures and high engine loads.
Indicator and warning symbols.
02 Instruments and controls
Indicator and warning symbols
02
50
Functionality check, symbols
All indicator and warning symbols1 illuminatewhen the remote control key is turned to posi-tion II before starting. This is to check that thesymbols are working. When the engine starts,all the symbols should go out except the park-ing brake symbol, which only goes out whenthe brake is disengaged.
If the engine does not start withinfive seconds, all symbols extin-guish except the symbols for afault in the car's emissions systemand for low oil pressure. Certainsymbols may have no function,depending on the car's specifica-tions.
Symbols in the centre of the instrumentpanel
G030755
The red warning symbol illumi-nates when a fault has been indi-cated which could affect the safetyand/or driveability of the car. Anexplanatory text is shown on the
information display at the same time. The sym-bol remains visible until the fault has been rec-tified but the text message can be cleared withthe READ button, see page 54. The warningsymbol can also illuminate in conjunction withother symbols.
When the symbol illuminates:
1. Stop in a safe manner. Do not drive the carfurther.
2. Read the information on the informationdisplay. Implement the action in accord-ance with the message in the display. Clearthe message using READ.
The yellow information symbol illu-minates and a text appears on theinformation display. The messagetext is cleared using the READ but-ton, see page 54, or disappears
automatically after a period of time (timedepending on which function is indicated).
The yellow information symbol can also illumi-nate in conjunction with other symbols.
NOTE
When a service message is shown, the sym-bol and message are cleared using theREAD button, or disappear automaticallyafter a time.
1 For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are given via display text, see page 54.
02 Instruments and controls
Indicator and warning symbols
02
��
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 51
Indicator symbols – left-hand side
G029048
Fault in car's emissions system
ABS fault
Rear fog lamp
Stability system DSTC
No function
Engine preheater (diesel)
Low level in fuel tank
Emissions system
If the symbol illuminates then itmay be due to a fault in the car'semissions system. Volvo recom-mends that you seek assistancefrom an authorised Volvo work-
shop for inspection.
ABS fault
If this symbol illuminates then thesystem is not working. The car'sregular brake system continues towork, but without the ABS func-tion.
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off theengine.
2. Restart the engine.
3. Drive to a workshop to have the ABS sys-tem checked if the symbol remains lit.Volvo recommends that you seek assis-tance from an authorised Volvo workshop.
Rear fog lamp
This symbol is lit when the rear foglamp is on.
Stability system DSTC*
For information on the system'sfunctions and symbols, seepage 169.
Engine preheater (diesel)
This symbol illuminates duringengine preheating. Preheatingoccurs when the temperature isbelow -2 °C. The car can be startedonce the symbol goes out.
Low level in fuel tank
When the symbol illuminates thelevel in the fuel tank is low, refuelas soon as possible.
02 Instruments and controls
Indicator and warning symbols
02
52
Indicator symbols – right-hand side
G029049
Indicator symbol for trailer
Parking brake applied
Airbags – SRS
Low oil pressure
Seatbelt reminder
Alternator not charging
Fault in brake system
Indicator symbol for trailer
This symbol flashes when thedirection indicators are used andthe trailer is connected. If the sym-bol does not flash then one of thelamps on the trailer or the car is
faulty.
Parking brake applied
The symbol illuminates when theparking brake is applied. Alwayspull the parking brake lever to theend position.
NOTE
The symbol illuminates irrespective of howhard the parking brake is applied.
Airbags – SRS
If this symbol remains illuminatedor illuminates while driving, itmeans a fault has been detected inthe seatbelt buckle, SRS, SIPS orIC system. Volvo recommends that
drive directly to an authorised Volvo workshopfor inspection.
Low oil pressure2
If this symbol illuminates duringdriving then the engine's oil pres-sure is too low. Stop the engineimmediately and check the engineoil level, top up if necessary. If the
symbol illuminates and the oil level is normalVolvo recommends that you contact an author-ised Volvo workshop.
Seatbelt reminder
This symbol illuminates if someonein a front seat has not put on theirseatbelt or if someone in a rearseat has taken off their seatbelt.
Alternator not charging
If this symbol illuminates whiledriving, a fault has occurred in theelectrical system. Volvo recom-mends that you visit an authorisedVolvo workshop.
Fault in brake system
If this symbol illuminates, the brakefluid level may be too low.
2 For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are given via display text, see page 54.
02 Instruments and controls
Indicator and warning symbols
02
53
– Stop the car in a safe place and check thelevel in the brake fluid reservoir, seepage 226. If the reservoir level is belowMIN then the car should not be driven fur-ther. Volvo recommends that the car istransported to an authorised Volvo work-shop to have the brake system checked.
If the BRAKE and ABS symbolsilluminate at the same time, theremay be a fault in the brake forcedistribution system.
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off theengine.
2. Restart the engine.
3. If both symbols extinguish, continue driv-ing.
4. If the symbols remain illuminated, checkthe level in the brake fluid reservoir, seepage 226.
5. If the brake fluid level is normal but thesymbols are still illuminated, the car can bedriven, with great care, to a workshop to
have the brake system checked. Volvo rec-ommends that you seek assistance froman authorised Volvo workshop.
6. If the level in the reservoir is below MIN
then the car should not be driven any fur-ther. Have the car transported to a work-shop to have the brake system checked.Volvo recommends that you seek assis-tance from an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
If the BRAKE and ABS symbols are lit at thesame time, there is a risk that the rear endwill skid during heavy braking.
Reminder – doors not closed
If one of the doors, the bonnet3 or the tailgateis not properly closed, the driver will bereminded of this.
Low speed
If the car moves at a speed lessthan 5 km/h, the information sym-bol illuminates and DRIVER
DOOR OPEN, PASSENGER
DOOR OPEN or BONNET OPEN
is shown on the display. Stop the car safely assoon as possible and close the door or bonnet.
High speed
If the car is moving faster than10 km/h, the symbol illuminatesand one of the texts indicated inthe preceding paragraph appearson the display.
Tailgate reminder
If the tailgate is open, this informa-tion symbol will illuminate andTAILGATE OPEN will appear onthe display.
3 Only cars with alarm.
02 Instruments and controls
Information display
02
54
Messages
G029050
When a warning or indicator symbol illuminatesthe information display shows a supplemen-tary message.
– Press the READ button (1).
Switch between messages with the READ but-ton. Fault messages are stored in the memoryuntil the fault is rectified.
NOTE
If a warning message appears while you areusing the trip computer, the message mustbe read (press READ) before the previousactivity can be resumed.
Message Specification
STOP SAFELYA Stop the car in a safemanner and turn offthe engine. Seriousrisk of damage.
SERVICE
URGENTAVolvo recommendsthat an authorisedVolvo workshopchecks the carimmediately.
SEE MANUALA Read the Owner'sManual.
SERVICE
REQUIREDAVolvo recommendsthat an authorisedVolvo workshopchecks the car assoon as possible.
HIGH ENGINE
TEMP STOP
ENGINE
Stop the car in a safemanner and turn offthe engine. Seriousrisk of damage.
BOOK TIME FOR
SERVICE
Time to book regularservice. Volvo rec-ommends that anauthorised Volvoworkshop carriesout the service.
Message Specification
TIME FOR REGU-
LAR SERVICE
Time for regularservice. Volvo rec-ommends that anauthorised Volvoworkshop carriesout the service. Thetiming is determinedby the number of kil-ometres driven,number of monthssince the last serv-ice, engine runningtime and oil grade.
SERVICE OVER-
DUE
If the service inter-vals are not followedthen the warrantydoes not cover anydamaged parts.Volvo recommendsthat an authorisedVolvo workshop car-ries out the service.
TRANSMISSION
OIL CHANGE NEE-
DED
Volvo recommendsthat an authorisedVolvo workshopchecks the car assoon as possible.
02 Instruments and controls
Information display
02
55
Message Specification
REMINDER
CHECK OIL LEVEL
Check the oil level.The message isshown every 10000 km (certainengine variants). Forinformation onchecking the oillevel, see page 222.
SOOT FILTER
FULL SEE OWNER
MANUAL
Diesel particle filterrequires regenera-tion, see page 146.
DSTC SPIN CON-
TROL OFF
The function of thestability and tractioncontrol system isreduced, seepage 170 for morevariants.
Message Specification
TRANSMISSION
PERFORMANCE
LOW
The gearbox cannothandle full capacity.Drive carefully untilthe message clears,see page 161.
If shown repeatedlythen Volvo recom-mends that anauthorised Volvoworkshop is contac-ted.
Message Specification
TRANSMISSION
OIL TEMP HIGH
Drive more smoothlyor stop the car in asafe manner. Disen-gage the gear andrun the engine atidling speed until themessage clears. Formore information,see page 161.
TRANSM OIL
TEMP STOP
SAFELY
Critical fault. Stopthe car immediatelyin a safe manner.Volvo recommendsthat an authorisedVolvo workshop iscontacted.B
A Part of message, shown together with information on wherethe problem has arisen.
B For more messages concerning automatic transmission, seepage 161.
02 Instruments and controls
Electrical socket
02
56 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
12 V electrical socket
G019621
Electrical socket and cigarette lighter.
The electrical socket can be used for variousaccessories designed for 12 V, e.g. TV screens,music players and mobile phones. For thesocket to supply current, the remote controlkey must be in at least position I, seepage 152.
IMPORTANT
Max. socket is 10 A (120 W) if one socket isused at a time. If both sockets are usedsimultaneously, 7.5 A (90 W) per socket isapplicable.
WARNING
Always leave the plug in the socket whenthe socket is not in use.
NOTE
Optional equipment and accessories - e.g.TV screens, music players and mobilephones - which are connected to one of thepassenger compartment's 12V electricalsockets, could be activated by the climatecontrol system, even when the remote con-trol key has been removed or when the caris locked, for example, when the parkingheater is activated at a preset time.
For this reason remove the plugs from theelectrical sockets for optional equipment oraccessories when not in use because thebattery could be drained in the event of suchan occurrence!
Cigarette lighter*
Activate the lighter by pushing in the button.The button pops out when the lighter is hot. Pullout the lighter and light a cigarette on theheated coils.
Electrical socket in the rear seat
G029082
Electrical socket in the rear seat.
The electrical socket in the rear seat can beused for various accessories, see "12 V elec-trical socket" above.
NOTE
Cigarette lighter does not work in thissocket.
The electrical socket is designed for 12 V. Forthe socket to supply current, the remote con-trol key must be in at least position I, seepage 152.
02 Instruments and controls
Electrical socket
02
57
WARNING
Always leave the plug in the socket whenthe socket is not in use.
02 Instruments and controls
Lighting panel
02
58 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
G020139
Thumbwheel for headlamp levelling
Light switches
Thumbwheel for adjusting display andinstrument lighting
Front fog lamps*
Opening the fuel filler flap
Rear fog lamp
Posi-tion
Specification
Automatic/deactivated dippedbeam. Only main beam flash.
Position/parking lamps
Automatic dipped beam. Mainbeam and main beam flashwork in this position.
Headlamp levelling
The load in the car changes the vertical align-ment of the headlamp beam, which could daz-zle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjustingthe height of the beam.
1. Turn the remote control key to position II.
2. Turn the headlamp control (2) to one of theend positions.
3. Roll the control (1) up or down respectivelyto raise or lower beam alignment.
Cars with active Xenon headlamps - ABL* haveautomatic headlamp levelling, so there is nocontrol (1).
Position/parking lamps
Position/parking lamps can be switched onirrespective of remote control key position.
– Turn the headlamp control (2) to the centreposition.
When the remote control key is in position II theposition/parking lamps and number plate light-ing are always on.
Headlamps
Automatic dipped beam*
Dipped beam comes on automatically whenthe remote control key is turned to position II,except when the headlamp control (2) is in thecentre position. If necessary, the automaticdipped beam can be deactivated. Volvo rec-ommends that this is performed by an author-ised Volvo workshop.
Automatic dipped beam, main beam
1. Turn the remote control key to position II.
2. Dipped beam is activated by means ofturning the headlamp control (2) clockwiseto the end position.
3. Main beam is activated by means of mov-ing the left-hand stalk switch towards thesteering wheel to the end position andreleasing it, see page 62.
02 Instruments and controls
Lighting panel
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 59
The lamps are switched off automatically whenthe remote control key is turned to position I or0.
Instrument lighting
The instrument lighting is switched on whenthe remote control key is in position II and theheadlamp control (2) is in one of the end posi-tions. The lighting is automatically dimmedduring the day and can be controlled manuallyat night.
– Roll the control up or down (3) for brighteror dimmer lighting.
Enhanced display lighting
To facilitate reading the odometer, trip meter,clock and outside temperature gauge, theseilluminate when the car is unlocked and whenthe remote control key is removed from theignition switch. The displays extinguish whenthe car is locked.
Fog lamps
NOTE
Regulations for use of fog lamps vary fromcountry to country.
Front fog lamps*
The front fog lamps can be switched on alongwith the headlamps or the position lamps/park-ing lamps.
– Press the button (4).
The light in the button (4) illuminates when thefront fog lamps are switched on.
Rear fog lamp
The rear fog lamp can only be switched on withthe headlamps or the front fog lamps.
– Press the button (6).
The rear fog lamp indicator symbol on the com-bined instrument panel and the light in the but-ton (6) illuminate when the rear fog lamp isswitched on.
Fuel filler flap
Press button (5) to open the fuel filler flap whenthe car is unlocked, see page 134.
Active Xenon headlamps*
G026507
Lighting panel, for active Xenon headlamps
If the car is equipped with active Xenon head-lamps (Active Bending Lights, ABL) the lightfrom the headlamps follows the steering wheelmovement in order to provide maximum light-ing in bends and junctions and so provideincreased safety.
The LED illuminates when the functionis activated. The LED flashes and an error mes-sage is shown on the information display in the
02 Instruments and controls
Lighting panel
02
60 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
event of a malfunction. The function is onlyactive in twilight or darkness and only when thecar is moving.
The function can be deactivated/activated withthe headlamp control.
G020789
Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left)and activated (right) respectively.
Daytime running lights - DRL*
To save fuel, daytime running lights (DaytimeRunning Light) can be selected during the dayinstead of the more energy-intensive dippedbeam. The daytime running lights mounted inthe spoiler use bright, low-energy diode tech-nology.
Position A automatically gives DRL daytime run-ning lights during the day.
Posi-tion
Specification
Daytime running lights
Daytime running lights when thecar is being driven. Automaticswitching to parking lights whenthe car is parked.
Headlamps and position lamps
Daytime running lights duringdaytime driving. Automaticswitching to headlamps andposition lamps in poor light con-ditions and when windscreenwipers or rear fog lamps areactivated.
If the car is equipped with activeXenon headlamps (ActiveBending Lights, ABL) then thisfunction is also activated.
With the light switch in position A, the daytimerunning lights are activated automatically dur-ing the day. This is regulated by a light sensorwhich switches from daytime running lights todipped beam off the main headlamps at duskor when the daylight becomes too weak.
02 Instruments and controls
Lighting panel
02
61
NOTE
To achieve minimal energy consumption,the rear lights are also switched off whenswitching automatically from dipped beamto DRLs.
WARNING
This system help to save energy - it cannotdetermine in all situations when daylight istoo weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mistand rain.
The driver is always responsible for ensuringthat the car is driven with its lights in a cor-rect state and in accordance with applicabletraffic regulations.
Brake light
The brake light automatically comes on duringbraking. For information on the Emergencybrake lights and automatic hazard warningflashers, see page 168.
02 Instruments and controls
Left-hand stalk switch
02
62
Stalk switch positions
34
1
2
1
2
G026380
Direction indicators - short flash sequence
Direction indicators - continuous flashsequence
Main beam flash
Home safe lighting and switching betweenmain and dipped beam.
Direction indicators
Short flash sequence
– Move the stalk switch up or down toposition (1) and release.> The direction indicators flash 3 times
and the stalk switch returns to its origi-nal position.
Continuous flash sequence
– Move the stalk switch up or down toend position (2).> The stalk switch remains in its end posi-
tion and is moved back manually, orautomatically by steering wheel move-ment.
Main beam flash
– Move the stalk switch gently towards thesteering wheel to position (3).> Main beam comes on until the stalk
switch is released.
Main beam flash only works when the remotecontrol key is inserted into the ignition switch.
Switching between main and dippedbeam
– Move the stalk switch to the end position(4) and release.
The remote control key must be in position IIand the headlamp control in end position, seepage 58, for main beam to be switched on.
Home safe lighting
Some of the exterior lighting can be keptswitched on to work as home safe lighting afterthe car has been locked. The standard delay is301 seconds, but can be changed to 60 or 90seconds, see page 82.
1. Remove the remote control key from theignition switch.
2. Move the stalk switch towards the steeringwheel to position (3) and release.
3. Get out of the car and lock the door.
1 Factory settings.
02 Instruments and controls
Left-hand stalk switch
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 63
Trip computer*
G029052
READ - confirms
Thumbwheel2 – browse between menusand options in the trip computer list.
RESET2 - resets
Controls
To scroll through trip computer informationturn the thumbwheel either up or down insteps. The menus are in an infinite loop.
NOTE
If a warning message interrupts while youare using the trip computer, this messagemust be acknowledged. Acknowledge bypressing the READ button and revert to thetrip computer function.
Functions
The trip computer displays the following infor-mation:
• --- KM/H AVERAGE SPEED
• --.- KM/L INSTANTANEOUS
• --.- L/100 KM AVERAGE
• --- KILOMETRES TO EMPTY TANK
• DSTC ON *, see page 169
• --- MPH ACTUAL SPEED 3
AVERAGE SPEED
Average speed is calculated from the latestreset, which is performed with the RESET but-ton.
INSTANTANEOUS
Current fuel consumption is calculated everysecond. The information on the display isupdated every couple of seconds. When thecar is stationary, "--.-" appears on the display.
During the period for regeneration4 fuel con-sumption may increase, see page 146.
AVERAGE
Average fuel consumption is calculated fromthe latest reset, which is performed with theRESET button.
NOTE
There may be a slight error in the reading ifa fuel-driven heater is used.
KILOMETRES TO EMPTY TANK
The range to empty is calculated based on theaverage fuel consumption over the last 30 km.No guaranteed range remains when the displayshows "--- KILOMETRES TO EMPTY TANK
". Refuel as soon as possible.
NOTE
There may be a slight error in the reading iffuel consumption is changed due to achange in driving style or if a fuel-drivenheater is used for example.
MPH ACTUAL SPEED3
Current speed is displayed in mph.
2 No function in cars without trip computer, fuel-driven parking heater as well as stability and traction control system.3 Certain markets.4 Only applies to diesel cars with particle filter.
02 Instruments and controls
Left-hand stalk switch
02
64
Resetting
1. Select --- KM/H AVERAGE SPEED or--.- L/100 KM AVERAGE
2. Reset with one press of the RESET button.
3. One long press of the RESET button (atleast 5 seconds) resets both averagespeed and average consumption simulta-neously.
02 Instruments and controls
Right-hand stalk switch
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 65
Windscreen wipers
Windscreen and headlamp washers
Rain sensor - On/Off
Thumbwheel
Rear window wiper and washer
Windscreen wipers off
The windscreen wipers are offwhen the stalk switch is in position0.
Single sweep
Raise the stalk switch to make asingle sweep.
Intermittent wiping
You can adjust and set a suitablespeed for intermittent wiping. Turnthe thumbwheel (C) up for a shorterinterval between sweeps. Turn itdown to increase the delay.
Continuous wiping
The wipers sweep at normalspeed.
The wipers sweep at high speed.
IMPORTANT
Before activating the wipers during winter –ensure that the wiper blades are not frozenin and that any snow or ice on the wind-screen (and rear window) is scraped away.
IMPORTANT
Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipersare cleaning the windscreen. The wind-screen must be wet when the windscreenwipers are operating.
Windscreen/headlamp washer
Move the stalk switch toward the steeringwheel to start the windscreen and headlampwashers. The wipers will make several moresweeps once the stalk switch is released.
High-pressure headlamp washing*
High-pressure headlamp washing consumes alarge quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, theheadlamps are washed as follows:
Dipped beam selected with the switch on light-ing panel:
The headlamps are washed the first time thewindscreen is washed. Within the next tenminutes, they are washed every fifth washcycle of the windscreen. In the event of a longerinterval the headlamps are washed each time.
Parking/position lamps selected with theswitch on the lighting panel:
• Active Xenon headlamps are only washedevery fifth wash cycle irrespective of thetime that elapses.
• Halogen headlamps are not washed.
The switch on the lighting panel is in position0:
• Active Xenon headlamps are only washedevery fifth wash cycle irrespective of thetime that elapses.
• Halogen headlamps are not washed.
02 Instruments and controls
Right-hand stalk switch
02
66 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Rear window wiper and washer
0
G021418
Move the stalk switch forward to start rear win-dow washing and wiping. The wiper blademakes several extra sweeps once washing hasfinished. The button at the end of the stalkswitch has three positions:
Intermittent wiping: Depress the top of thebutton.
Neutral position: Function deactivated.
Constant speed: Depress the bottom ofthe button.
NOTE
The rear window wiper is equipped withoverheating protection which means thatthe motor is switched off if it overheats. Therear window wiper works again after a cool-ing period (30 seconds or longer, dependingon the heat in the motor and the outsidetemperature).
Wiper – reversing
Engaging reverse gear while the windscreenwipers are on initiates intermittent rear windowwiping. If the rear window wiper is already onat normal speed, no change is made.
The function for intermittent wiping for reversecan be deactivated. Volvo recommends thatyou contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
Rain sensor*
G029053
The rain sensor automatically activates thewindscreen wipers based on how much waterit detects on the windscreen. The sensitivity ofthe rain sensor can be adjusted using thethumbwheel (C), see page 65.
Turn the thumbwheel upwards for higher sen-sitivity and downwards for lower sensitivity, (anextra sweep is made when the thumbwheel isturned upwards).
On/Off
When activating the rain sensor, the remotecontrol key must be in position I or II and thewindscreen wiper stalk switch must be in posi-tion 0 (not activated).
02 Instruments and controls
Right-hand stalk switch
02
67
Activating the rain sensor:
– Press the button (B), see page 65. A displaysymbol shows that the rain sensor isactive.
To turn the rain sensor off, either:
1. Press button (B)
2. Press the stalk switch downward toanother wiper program. If the stalk switchis raised, the rain sensor will remain active,the wipers make an extra sweep and thenreturn to rain sensor mode when the stalkis released to position 0 (not activated), seepage 65.
The rain sensor is automatically deactivatedwhen the remote control key is removed fromthe ignition switch or five minutes after the igni-tion is switched off.
IMPORTANT
At an automatic car wash: Deactivate therain sensor by pressing the button (B) whilethe remote control key is in position I or II.Otherwise, the windscreen wipers couldstart swiping and become damaged.
Thumbwheel
Use the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency ofwiper sweeps when intermittent wiping is
selected, or the sensitivity to rain when the rainsensor is selected.
02 Instruments and controls
Cruise control*
02
68 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Activating
G020141
The controls for cruise control are to the left ofthe steering wheel.
Setting the desired speed:
1. Press the CRUISE button. CRUISE isshown on the combined instrument panel.
2. Touch + or – to lock the vehicle speed.CRUISE-ON appears in the combinedinstrument panel.
Cruise control cannot be engaged at speedsbelow 30 km/h or above 200 km/h.
Increasing or decreasing speed
G029054
– Increase or decrease the speed by press-ing and holding + or –. The speed of the carwhen the button is released is set as thenew speed.
A brief press (less than half a second) on + or– changes the speed by 1 km/h or 1 mph1.
NOTE
A temporary increase in speed (less thanone minute) using the accelerator, such aswhile overtaking, does not affect the cruisecontrol setting. When you release the accel-erator, the car will return to the programmedspeed.
Temporary disengagement
– Press 0 to disengage the cruise controltemporarily. CRUISE will be shown on thecombined instrument panel. The speed setearlier is stored in the memory.
The cruise control is also temporarily disen-gaged when:
• the brake pedal or clutch pedal isdepressed
• speed falls below 25-30 km/h1 when trav-elling uphill
• the gear selector is moved to position N
• wheel spin or wheel lock-up occurs
• a temporary increase in speed lasts longerthan one minute.
1 Depending on engine type.
02 Instruments and controls
Cruise control*
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 69
Return to the set speed
– Press this button to resume thepreviously set speed. CRUISE
ON appears on the combinedinstrument panel.
Disengaging
– Press CRUISE to disengage the cruisecontrol. CRUISE ON clears on the com-bined instrument panel.
02 Instruments and controls
Keypad in the steering wheel*
02
70 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Button functions
The keypad is available in two versions dependingon the equipment in the car.
The four buttons at the bottom of the steeringwheel keypad control the radio and the phone.The function of a button depends on whichsystem is active. The steering wheel keypadcan be used to scroll between preset stations,change CD tracks and adjust the volume.
– Press and hold one of the arrow keys tofast forward/reverse or search for the nextstation.
The phone must be active to make settings inthe phone system. Activate the phone functionwith the PHONE button in the centre console
in order to enable control of the phone systemwith the arrow keys.
To return to Audio only, press EXIT.. To returnto the phone menu, press EXIT once again.
With the ENTER button you can select, acti-vate and deactivate options in menus. The but-ton can also be used to access the folder struc-ture and start the playback of audio files if adisc with audio files is inserted in the CD player/CD changer*. For more information, seepage 262.
02 Instruments and controls
Steering wheel adjustment, hazard warning flashers
02
71
Steering wheel adjustment
G020143
The steering wheel can be adjusted for bothheight and reach.
1. Pull the lever towards you to release thesteering wheel.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the positionthat suits you best.
3. Push back the lever to fix the steeringwheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press thesteering wheel lightly at the same time asyou push the lever back.
WARNING
Adjust the steering wheel before driving off,never while driving. Before driving, checkthat the steering wheel is fixed in position.
Hazard warning flashers
G020144
Use the hazard warning flashers (all directionindicators flash) when the car is stopped whereit could be a traffic hazard or obstruction. Pressthe button to activate the function.
A sufficiently violent collision or heavy brakingactivates the hazard warning flashers automat-ically, see page 168. The function can bedeactivated with the button.
NOTE
Regulations regarding the use of hazardwarning flashers vary from country to coun-try.
02 Instruments and controls
Parking brake
02
72
General
Instrument panel warning symbol and warninglabel for risk of crushing.
The lever is located between the front seats.
WARNING
Make sure that children, other passengersor objects are not in danger of becomingtrapped in any way when the parking brakeis applied or released by the driver.
Applying the parking brake
1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
2. Pull the lever firmly.
> The instrument panel's warning symbolis illuminated.
NOTE
The warning lamp symbol in the combinedinstrument panel illuminates irrespective ofhow hard the parking brake is applied.
3. Release the foot brake pedal and makesure that the car is at a standstill position.
4. If the vehicle moves then the parking brakelever must be pulled up a little bit further.
• When parking the vehicle, always engage1st gear (for manual gearbox) or put thegear selector in position P (for automaticgearbox).
Parking on a hill
If the car is parked facing uphill:
• Turn the wheels away from the kerb.
If the car is parked facing downhill:
• Turn the wheels towards the kerb.
WARNING
Get into the habit of always applying theparking brake when parking on a slope -leaving the car in gear, or in P if it has auto-matic transmission, is not sufficient to holdthe car in all situation.
Disengaging the parking brake
1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
2. Pull the parking brake lever up slightly,press the button, lower the parking brakelever and release the button.> The instrument panel's warning symbol
is switched off.
02 Instruments and controls
Power windows
02
73
Operation
The power windows are operated using thecontrols in the doors. The key position must beI or II for the power windows to operate.
The windows continue to work for a limitedamount of time when the car is stopped andafter the remote control key is removed, provi-ded none of the doors is opened. Operate thewindows with caution.
To open a window:
– Depress the front of the control.
To close a window:
– Raise the front of the control.
Remote control and lock buttons
To operate the power windows with lock but-tons and remote control, see pages 126 and134.
WARNING
Make sure that children and other passen-gers cannot be trapped in any way whenclosing the windows. Pay close attention ifthe windows are closed with the remotecontrol.
Driver's door
Controls, power windows front
The driver can operate both of the power win-dows from the driver's seat.
The windows can be opened and closed in twoways:
Manual operation
Depress one of the controls (1) gently or raiseit gently. The power window opens or closesas long as the switch is actuated.
Automatic operation
Fully depress one of the controls (1) or raise it,then release. The side window will then openor close automatically. If the window is
obstructed by an object, the movement willstop.
WARNING
The function that interrupts the movementof the windows in the event of them beingblocked works with both automatic andmanual closing, although not with pinchprotection deployed.
WARNING
If there are children in the car:
Remember to switch off the supply to thepower windows by removing the remotecontrol key if the driver leaves the car.
Make sure that children and other passen-gers cannot be trapped in any way whenclosing the windows.
02 Instruments and controls
Power windows
02
74
Passenger seat
Passenger seat.
The control in the front passenger door oper-ates that window only.
02 Instruments and controls
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
02
��
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 75
Interior rearview mirror
Bright light from behind could be reflected inthe rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Usedimming when disturbed by light from behind.
Dipping
Control for dimming
Normal position
Dimmed position.
Automatic dimming*
Bright light from behind is automaticallydimmed by the rearview mirror. The control (1)is not available in mirrors with automatic dim-ming.
Interior rearview mirror with compass*
G031043
The upper right-hand corner of the rearviewmirror has an integrated display that shows thecompass direction in which the front of the caris pointing. Eight different directions are shownwith English abbreviations: N (north), NE (northeast), E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW
(south west), W (west) and NW (north west).
Calibrating the compass
G031045
The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.The compass is set for the geographical areato which the car was delivered. The compassshould be calibrated if the car is moved acrossseveral magnetic zones.
1. Stop the car in a wide open area with theengine running at idling speed.
2. Press and hold button (1) for at least 6 sec-onds. Following which, the character C isshown (the button is concealed so use apaper clip for example to press it in).
3. Press and hold button (1) for at least 3 sec-onds. The number for the current magneticzone is displayed.
02 Instruments and controls
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
02
76
4. Press the button (1) repeatedly until thenumber for the required magnetic zone (1–
15) is shown, refer to the map of magneticzones for the compass.
5. Wait until the display returns to showingthe character C.
6. Following which, press and hold the buttonin for 9 seconds and select L for left-handdrive cars and R for right-hand drive.
7. Drive slowly in a circle with a maximumspeed of 10 km/h until a compass directionis shown on the display, which indicatesthat the calibration is complete.
G020150
Magnetic zones, Europe.
G020151
Magnetic zones, Asia.
G020152
Magnetic zones, South America.
G020153
Magnetic zones, Australia.
G020154
Magnetic zones, Africa.
02 Instruments and controls
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 77
Door mirrors
The controls for adjusting the two door mirrorsare at the front of the driver's door armrest. Therearview mirrors can be operated in key posi-tion I and II.
1. Press the L button for the left-hand doormirror or the R button for the right-handdoor mirror. The light on the button illumi-nates.
2. Adjust the position with the joystick in thecentre.
3. Press the L or R button again. The lightgoes out.
Retractable power door mirrors*
The mirrors can be retracted for parking/drivingin narrow spaces. This can be carried out in keyposition I and II.
Retracting the mirrors
1. Press the L and R button at the same time.
2. Release the buttons. The mirrors automat-ically stop in the fully retracted position.
WARNING
The door mirror on the driver's side is thewide-angled type to provide optimal vision.Objects may appear further away than theyactually are.
Folding out the mirrors
1. Press the L and R button at the same time.
2. Release the buttons. The mirrors automat-ically stop in the fully extended position.
Automatic retracting/extending
When the car is locked/unlocked with theremote control or using the Keyless-system,see page 130, the door mirrors are automati-cally retracted/extended.
NOTE
The door mirrors will not be extended auto-matically during unlocking if they wereretracted using the controls in the door.
If the car is locked with the remote controland is then started, the door mirrors will stillbe extended.
The function can be activated/deactivatedunder Car settings… Mirror fold on
locking, see page 82 for a description of themenu system.
Resetting to neutral
Mirrors that have been moved out of positionby an external force must be reset to the neutralposition for electric retracting and extending towork.
1. Use the L and R buttons to retract the mir-rors.
2. Extend the mirrors again with the L and Rbutton. The mirrors are now reset to theneutral.
Home safe and approach lighting
The light* on the door mirrors illuminates whenthe approach lighting or home safe lighting isactivated.
02 Instruments and controls
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
02
78 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Blind Spot Information System, BLIS*
BLIS is an information system that under cer-tain conditions can help to draw the driver'sattention to vehicles moving in the same direc-tion in the so-called "blind spot", seepage 173.
02 Instruments and controls
Power sunroof*
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 79
Open positions
G007503
The sunroof controls are located in the roofpanel. The sunroof can be opened in two posi-tions:
Ventilation position, up at the rear edge
Sliding position, backwards/forwards
The remote control key must be in position I orII.
WARNING
If there are children in the car:
Switch off the supply to the power sunroofby removing the remote control key if thedriver leaves the car.
G029222
Opening, automatic
Opening, manual
Closing, manual
Closing, automatic
Opening, ventilation position
Closing, ventilation position
Ventilation position
Open:
– Press the rear edge of the control (5)upward.
Close:
– Pull the rear edge of the control (6) down-ward.
From ventilation position to fully open sunroof:
– Pull the control rearward to the end posi-tion (1) and release.
Sliding position
Automatic operation
– Pull the control past the point of resistance(2) to the rear end position (1) or past thepoint of resistance (3) to the forward endposition (4) and release. The sunroofopens/closes completely.
Manual operation
Open:
– Pull the control rearward to the point ofresistance (2). The sunroof moves to maxi-mum open position as long as the buttonis kept depressed.
Close:
– Press the control forward to the point ofresistance (3). The sunroof moves to
02 Instruments and controls
Power sunroof*
02
80 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
closed position as long as the button iskept depressed.
WARNING
The sunroof's pinch-protection functiononly operates during automatic closing, notmanual closing.
Closing with remote control or lockbutton
G020157
– One long press on the lock button closesthe sunroof and all the windows. The doorsand the tailgate are locked.
If you need to interrupt closing:
– Press the lock button again.
WARNING
Make sure that children or other passengersare not in danger of becoming trapped inany way when closing the sunroof with theremote control. Always operate the sunroofwith caution.
Sunscreen
The sunroof features a manual, sliding interiorsunscreen. The sunscreen slides back auto-matically when the sunroof is opened. Grip thehandle and slide the screen forward to close it.
Pinch protection
The sunroof's pinch protection function is acti-vated if the hatch is blocked by an object. Ifblocked, the sunroof will stop and automati-cally open to the previous position.
WARNING
The sunroof's pinch protection function onlyoperates during automatic closing, not dur-ing manual closing.
Make sure that nobody is in danger ofbecoming trapped in any way when closingthe sunroof.
Wind deflector
The sunroof has a wind deflector that is foldedup when the sunroof is in the open position.
02 Instruments and controls
Personal preferences
02
81
Possible settings
Personal preferences can be set for some ofthe car's functions. This applies to locks, cli-mate control and audio functions. For audiofunctions, see page 252.
Control panel
Control panel.
Display
MENU
EXIT
ENTER
Navigation
Use
The settings are shown on the display (A).
Open the menu to enter settings:
1. Press MENU (B).
2. Scroll, for example, to Car settings… withthe navigation button (E).
3. Press ENTER (D).
4. Select an alternative with the navigationbutton (E).
5. Press ENTER to activate the selection.
Activated function is shown in the displaywith . Deactivated function is shown inthe display with .
Close the menu:
– Press EXIT (C) for approximately one sec-ond.
Clock, adjustment
The hour and minute are each adjusted sepa-rately.
1. Use the numbers on the keypad or "arrowup" or "arrow down" on the navigation but-ton (E).
2. Select the number for adjustment using"arrow right" or "arrow left" on the naviga-tion button.
3. Press ENTER to start the clock.
NOTE
If the car has a 12-hour clock then AM/PMis selected using "arrow up" or "arrowdown" after the final minute number hasbeen adjusted.
Climate settings
Automatic blower adjust
The fan speed can be set to AUTO mode incars equipped with ECC:
– Select from Low, Normal and High.
Recirculation timer
When the timer is active, the air recirculates for3-12 minutes, depending on the outside airtemperature.
02 Instruments and controls
Personal preferences
02
82 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
– Select On/Off depending on whether or notyou wish the recirculation timer to beactive.
Reset all
Resets the climate function options to the fac-tory settings.
Car settings
Retract mirrors when locking*
When the car is locked/unlocked with theremote control the door mirrors can be retrac-ted/extended automatically. The On/Off optionis available.
Reduced guard*
The deadlocks function can be temporarilydeactivated and the alarm level reduced ifsomeone wishes to remain in the car and thedoors have to be locked from the outside. TheActivate once and Ask on exit options areavailable, see pages 135 and 138.
Unlock confirm. light
The hazard warning flashers can provide feed-back when the car is unlocked with the remotecontrol. The On/Off option is available.
Lock confirm. light
The hazard warning flashers can provide feed-back when the car is locked with the remotecontrol. The On/Off option is available.
Doors – auto lock
When the speed of the car exceeds 7 km/h thedoors and tailgate can be locked automatically.The On/Off option is available.
Doors unlock
There are two alternatives for unlocking:
• All doors – one press of the remote controlunlocks both doors and the tailgate.
• Driver door, then all – one press of theremote control unlocks the driver's door. Asecond press then unlocks the passengerdoor and the tailgate.
Keyless entry
• All doors - both doors and the tailgate areunlocked simultaneously1.
• Any door – any door or the tailgate can beunlocked separately.
Simultaneous closing/opening of all
windows
This function can be selected for the lock but-ton on the remote control and the front doors'central locking button, as well as the outside
door handle button on cars with the keylesssystem:
• Auto. close all windows - all windowsand the sunroof are closed simultaneouslywith one long press on the lock button.
This function can be selected for the unlockbutton on the remote control and the frontdoors' central locking button:
• Auto. open all windows – all windows areopened simultaneously with one longpress on the unlock button.
Approach lighting
Select the time the car's lights should remainswitched on when the approach lighting buttonis pressed - see page 126.
The following alternatives are available:
• 30 seconds
• 60 seconds
• 90 seconds
Home safe lighting
Select the time the car's lights should remainon when the left-hand stalk switch is pulledback after the remote control key has beenremoved - see page 62.
The following alternatives are available:
1 Both doors and the tailgate can also be locked simultaneously.
02 Instruments and controls
Personal preferences
02
83
• 30 seconds
• 60 seconds
• 90 seconds
Information
• VIN number… - (Vehicle IdentificationNumber) is the car's unique identity num-ber.
• Number of keys… - The number of keysregistered for the car is shown.
02 Instruments and controls
HomeLink *
02
84 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
G030070
HomeLink is a programmable remote controlwhich can control up to three different devices(e.g. garage door, alarm system, outdoor light-ing and indoor lighting etc.) and in doing soreplace their remote controls. HomeLink issupplied built into the left-hand sun visor.
The HomeLink panel consists of three pro-grammable buttons and one indicator lamp.
NOTE
HomeLink is designed not to work if the caris locked from the outside.
Save the original remote controls for futureprogramming (e.g. when switching toanother car).
Delete the button programming when thecar is to be sold.
Metallic sun visors should not be used incars fitted with HomeLink . This may havean adverse effect on its function.
Operation
When HomeLink is fully programmed it can beused in place of the separate original remotecontrols.
Depress the programmed button to activatethe garage door, alarm system etc. The indi-cator lamp illuminates for the time that the but-ton is kept depressed.
NOTE
If the ignition is not activated, HomeLinkwill work for 30 minutes after the driver'sdoor has been opened.
The original remote controls can of course beused in parallel with HomeLink .
WARNING
If HomeLink is used to operate a garagedoor or gate, ensure that nobody is in thevicinity of the door or gate while it is inmotion.
Do not use the HomeLink remote controlfor any garage door that does not havesafety stop and safety reverse. The garagedoor must react immediately when itdetects that something is preventing itsmovement, and stop directly and reverse. Agarage door without these characteristicscould cause personal injury. For furtherinformation - contact the supplier via theInternet: www.homelink.com.
Programming for the first time
The first step erases the memory inHomeLink and must not be carried out whenonly one individual button is being reprogram-med.
1. Depress the two outer buttons and do notrelease until the indicator lamp starts toflash after approx. 20 seconds. The flash-ing indicates that HomeLink is set in"learn mode" and is ready to be pro-grammed.
2. Position the original remote control5-30 cm from HomeLink . Monitor the indi-cator lamp.
02 Instruments and controls
HomeLink *
02
��
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 85
The particular distance that is requiredbetween the original remote control andHomeLink depends on the programmingof the device in question. Perhaps severalattempts will be required at different dis-tances. Maintain each position for approx.15 seconds before trying a new one.
3. Depress the button for the original remotecontrol and the button to be programmedon HomeLink simultaneously. Do notrelease the buttons until the indicator lamphas changed over from slow to rapid flash-ing. The rapid flashing indicates successfulprogramming.
4. Test the programming by depressing theprogrammed button on HomeLink andwatching the indicator lamp:
• Constant glow: The indicator lamp illu-minates with a constant glow when thebutton is kept depressed, this indicatesthat the programming is complete. Thegarage door, gate or similar should nowbe activated when the programmedHomeLink button is depressed.
• Glow not constant: The indicator lampflashes quickly for approx. 2 secondsand then changes over to a constantglow for approx. 3 seconds. This proc-
ess is repeated for approx. 20 secondsand indicates that the device has a "roll-ing code". The garage door, gate or sim-ilar is not activated when the pro-grammed HomeLink button isdepressed. Continue the programmingin accordance with the following.
5. Locate the "programming button1" on thereceiver for the garage door for example,normally located close to the antenna'sbracket on the receiver. If you have diffi-culty in finding the button - consult thesupplier's manual, or contact the suppliervia the Internet: www.homelink.com.
6. Depress and release the "programmingbutton". The button flashes forapprox. 30 seconds and the next step mustbe carried out within this period.
7. Depress the programmed button onHomeLink , while the "programming but-ton" is still flashing, keep it depressed forapprox. 3 seconds and then release.Repeat the press/hold/release sequenceup to 3 times to conclude the program-ming.
Programming individual buttons
To reprogram an individual button, proceed inaccordance with the following:
1. Depress the required button onHomeLink and do not release until step 3has been completed.
2. When the indicator lamp on HomeLinkstarts to flash, after approx. 20 seconds,position the original remote control5-30 cm from HomeLink . Monitor the indi-cator lamp.
The particular distance that is requiredbetween the original remote control andHomeLink depends on the programming ofthe device in question. Perhaps severalattempts will be required at different dis-tances. Maintain each position for approx.15 seconds before trying a new one.
3. Depress the button on the original remotecontrol. The indicator lamp will start toflash. When the flashing has changed overfrom a slow to a rapid flashing - releaseboth buttons. The rapid flashing indicatessuccessful programming.
4. Test the programming by depressing theprogrammed button on HomeLink andwatching the indicator lamp:
1 Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.
02 Instruments and controls
HomeLink *
02
86 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
• Constant glow: The indicator lamp illu-minates with a constant glow when thebutton is kept depressed, this indicatesthat the programming is complete. Thegarage door, gate or similar should nowbe activated when the programmedHomeLink button is depressed.
• Glow not constant: The indicator lampflashes quickly for approx. 2 secondsand then changes over to a constantglow for approx. 3 seconds. This proc-ess is repeated for approx. 20 secondsand indicates that the device has a "roll-ing code". The garage door, gate or sim-ilar is not activated when the pro-grammed HomeLink button isdepressed. Continue the programmingin accordance with the following.
5. Locate the "programming button2" on thereceiver for the garage door for example,normally located close to the antenna'sbracket on the receiver. If you have diffi-culty in finding the button - consult thesupplier's manual, or contact the suppliervia the Internet: www.homelink.com.
6. Depress and release the "programmingbutton". The button flashes for approx. 30seconds and the next step must be carriedout within this period.
7. Depress the programmed button onHomeLink , while the "programming but-ton" is still flashing, keep it depressed forapprox. 3 seconds and then release.Repeat the press/hold/release sequenceup to 3 times to conclude the program-ming.
Erasing programming
It is only possible to erase the programming forall the buttons on HomeLink , not for individualbuttons.
– Depress the two outer buttons and do notrelease until the indicator lamp starts toflash after approx. 20 seconds.> HomeLink is now set in so-called
"learn mode" and is ready to be pro-grammed once more, see page 84.
2 Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.
02 Instruments and controls
02
87
88 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General information on climate control................................................... 90Manual climate control, AC..................................................................... 92Electronic climate control, ECC*............................................................. 95Air distribution......................................................................................... 98Fuel-driven engine block heaterand passenger compartment heater*..................................................... 99Fuel-driven auxiliary heater* (diesel)..................................................... 102
CLIMATE CONTROL
03 Climate control
General information on climate control
03
90
Air conditioning
The climate control system cools or heats aswell as dehumidifies the air in the passengercompartment. The car is equipped with eithermanual (AC) or electronic climate control (ECC,Electronic Climate Control).
NOTE
The air conditioning system can beswitched off, but to ensure the best possibleair in the passenger compartment and pre-vent the windows from misting, it shouldalways be on.
Misting windows
Remove misting on the insides of the windowsby first using the defroster function.
To reduce the risk of misting, clean the win-dows with a normal window cleaning agent.
Ice and snow
Remove ice and snow from the climate controlair intake (the grille between the bonnet and thewindscreen).
Fault tracing and repair
Volvo recommends that you only entrust faulttracing and repair of the climate control systemto an authorised Volvo workshop.
Refrigerant
The air conditioning system contains R134arefrigerant. This refrigerant contains no chlo-rine, which means that it is harmless to theozone layer. The system must only be chargedwith R134a refrigerant, see also page 292.Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvoworkshop carries out this work.
Passenger compartment filter
All air entering the car's passenger compart-ment is only cleaned with one filter. This mustbe replaced at regular intervals. Follow theVolvo Service Programme for the recom-mended replacement intervals. If the car isused in a severely contaminated environment,it may be necessary to replace the filter moreoften.
NOTE
There are different types of passenger com-partment filter. Make sure that the correctfilter is fitted.
Display
There is a display above the climate controlpanel. This displays climate control settings.
Personal preferences
You can set preferences for two climate controlfunctions:
• Fan speed in AUTO mode (applies only tocars with ECC).
• Recirculation timer for passenger com-partment air.
For information about these settings, seepage 81.
03 Climate control
General information on climate control
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 91
Air vents in the dashboard
G019942
Open
Closed
Lateral airflow
Vertical airflow
Aim the outer vents towards the side windowsto remove misting from the front side windows.
During cold weather - Close the centre ventsfor optimum comfort and best demisting.
ECC*
Actual temperature
The temperature you select corresponds to thephysical experience with reference to factorssuch as air speed, humidity and solar radiationin and around the car.
The system includes a sun sensor whichdetects the side from which the sun is shininginto the passenger compartment. This meansthat the temperature can differ between theright and left-hand air vents despite the con-trols being set for the same temperature onboth sides.
Sensor location
• The sun sensor is on the top side of thedashboard.
• The temperature sensor for the passengercompartment is behind the climate controlpanel.
• The outside temperature sensor is locatedon the door mirror.
• The humidity sensor is located in the inte-rior rearview mirror.
NOTE
Do not cover or block the sensors withclothing or other objects.
Side windows and sunroof
To ensure that the air conditioning works sat-isfactorily, close all side windows and the sun-roof (if fitted).
Acceleration
The air conditioning system switches off tem-porarily at full throttle. You may briefly feel atemporary rise in temperature.
Condensation
In warm weather, condensation from the airconditioning may drip under the car. This isnormal.
03 Climate control
Manual climate control, AC
03
92
Control panel
Fan
Recirculation
Defroster
Air distribution
AC ON/OFF – Air conditioning On/Off
Heated front left seat
Heated front right seat
Rear window and door mirror defrosters
Temperature
Functions
1. Fan
Increase or decrease the fanspeed by turning the knob.
If the knob is turned anticlock-wise and the fan indicator inthe display goes out, the fanand the air conditioning are
switched off. The display shows the fan symboland OFF.
2. Recirculation
Recirculation can be used toshut out bad air, exhaustfumes, etc. from the passen-ger compartment. The air inthe passenger compartmentis recirculated. No outside airis taken into the car. Recircu-
lation (together with the air conditioning sys-tem) cools the passenger compartment morequickly in hot weather. If the air in the car recir-culates for too long then there is a risk of thewindows misting.
03 Climate control
Manual climate control, AC
03
��
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 93
Timer
The timer function reduces the risk of icing,misting and bad air (if recirculation is selected).See page 81, for activating/deactivating thefunction. When the Defroster (3) program isselected, recirculation is deactivated.
3. Defroster
Used to quickly remove mist-ing and ice from the wind-screen and side windows. Airflows to the windows at highfan speed. The light in thedefroster button illuminateswhen the function is active.
The following also takes place when thedefroster function is activated in order to pro-vide maximum dehumidification in the passen-ger compartment:
• the air conditioning (AC) is automaticallyswitched on (can be switched off with theAC button (5)
• recirculation is automatically disengaged.
When the defroster is switched off the climatecontrol returns to the previous settings.
4. Air distribution
The airflow can be distributedto the windows, dashboardvents or floor by pressing theair distribution buttons.
A symbol on the displayabove the climate control
panel and an illuminated light in the relevantbutton indicate which function has beenselected.
Refer to the table on page 98.
5. AC – On/Off (ON/OFF)
ON: The air conditioning is on.It is controlled by the system'sAUTO function. This way,incoming air is cooled anddehumidified.
OFF: The air conditioning isoff.
When the defroster function is activated the airconditioning is automatically switched on (canbe switched off with the AC button). An illumi-nated lamp above ON and OFF respectively inthe button shows the function selected.
6. and 7. Heated front seats*
Higher heat:
– Press the button once – both lights illumi-nate.
Lower heat:
– Press the button once – one light illumi-nates.
Heat off:
– Press the button three times – light not illu-minated.
8. Rear window and door mirror
defrosters
Heating is used to quicklyremove misting and ice fromthe rear window and door mir-rors. Press the button once tostart simultaneous rear win-dow and rearview mirrordefrosting. The function is
active if one lamp is illuminated in the button.
The function is switched off manually or auto-matically. Switch off manually with one press
03 Climate control
Manual climate control, AC
03
94 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
on the button. Automatic switching off discon-nects the rear window and door mirrors after12 – 20 minutes depending on outside tem-perature.
During cold weather the defrosting* also con-tinues after 20 minutes in order to keep the rearwindow and door mirrors free of ice and mist.The intensity of the defrosting can be adaptedto the outside temperature. This function mustbe switched off manually.
9. Temperature
Select cooling or heating forboth driver and passengerside.
03 Climate control
Electronic climate control, ECC*
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 95
Control panel
AUTO
Fan
Recirculation/Air quality system
Defroster
Air distribution
AC ON/OFF – Air conditioning On/Off
Heated front left seat
Heated front right seat
Rear window and door mirror defrosters
Temperature selector
Functions
1. AUTO
The AUTO function automat-ically regulates climate con-trol and maintains theselected temperature. TheAUTO function controls heat-ing, air conditioning, fanspeed, recirculation, and air
distribution.
If you select one or more manual functions, theother functions continue to be controlled auto-matically. All manual settings are switched offwhen AUTO is switched on. The display showsAUTO CLIMATE.
2. Fan
Turn the knob to increase ordecrease fan speed. If AUTO
is selected then fan speed isregulated automatically. Thepreviously set fan speed isdisengaged.
NOTE
If the knob is turned anticlockwise and thefan indicator in the display goes out, the fanand the air conditioning are switched off.The display shows the fan symbol andOFF.
03 Climate control
Electronic climate control, ECC*
03
96 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
3. Recirculation
The function is selected toshut out bad air, exhaustgases etc. from the passen-ger compartment. The air inthe passenger compartmentis recirculated, i.e. no outsideair is taken into the car when
this function is activated. If the air in the carrecirculates for too long, there is a risk of mist-ing on the insides of the windows.
Timer
The timer function reduces the risk of icing,misting and bad air (if recirculation is selected).To activate/deactivate the function seepage 81.
NOTE
When Defroster (4) is selected, recirculationis always deactivated.
3. Air quality system*
Same button as recirculation.
The air quality system consists of a multi-filterand a sensor. The filter separates gases andparticles to reduce the levels of odours andpollution in the passenger compartment. Whenthe sensor detects polluted outside air, the airintakes are closed and the air in the passengercompartment is recirculated. A green light (A)illuminates in the button when the air qualitysensor is active.
Activating the air quality sensor:
– Press AUTO (1) to activate the air qualitysensor (normal setting).
Or:
– Switch between three functions by press-ing repeatedly the recirculation button.
• Air quality sensor engaged – the light (A)illuminates.
• No recirculation engaged, provided it is notrequired for cooling in hot weather – lightnot illuminated.
• Recirculation engaged – the light (M) illu-minates.
Keep the following in mind:
• As a rule, the air quality sensor shouldalways be engaged.
• Recirculation is limited in cold weather toavoid misting.
• The defroster functions for the front, sideand rear windows can be used to demistthe windows.
4. Defroster
Used to quickly remove mist-ing and ice from the wind-screen and side windows. Airflows to the windows at highfan speed. The light in thedefroster button illuminateswhen the function is active.
The following also takes place when thedefroster function is activated in order to pro-vide maximum dehumidification in the passen-ger compartment:
• the air conditioning (AC) is automaticallyswitched on (can be switched off with theAC button (6)
• recirculation is automatically disengaged.
When the defroster is switched off the climatecontrol returns to the previous settings.
5. Air distribution
The airflow can be distributedto the windows, dashboardvents or floor by pressing theair distribution buttons.
03 Climate control
Electronic climate control, ECC*
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 97
A symbol on the display above the climate con-trol panel and an illuminated light in the relevantbutton indicate which function has beenselected.
Refer to the table on page 98.
6. AC – On/Off (ON/OFF)
ON: The air conditioning is on.It is controlled by the system'sAUTO function. This way,incoming air is cooled anddehumidified.
OFF: Off
When the defroster function is activated the airconditioning is automatically switched on (canbe switched off with the AC button).
NOTE
The climate control system's demistingfunction with humidity sensor is significantlyreduced with the air conditioning in deacti-vated mode (OFF), as well as with manuallyselected air distribution and fan speed.
7 and 8. Heated front seats*
To activate front seat heating:
Higher heat:
– Press the button once – both lights illumi-nate.
Lower heat:
– Press the button once – one light illumi-nates.
Heat off:
– Press the button three times – light not illu-minated.
9. Rear window and door mirror
defrosters
Heating is used to quicklyremove misting and ice fromthe rear window and door mir-rors. Press the button once tostart simultaneous rear win-dow and rearview mirrordefrosting. The function is
active if one lamp is illuminated in the button.
The function is switched off manually or auto-matically. Switch off manually with one press
on the button. Automatic switching off discon-nects the rear window and door mirrors after12 – 20 minutes depending on outside tem-perature.
During cold weather the defrosting* also con-tinues after 20 minutes in order to keep the rearwindow and door mirrors free of ice and mist.The intensity of the defrosting can be adaptedto the outside temperature. This function mustbe switched off manually.
10. Temperature selector
The temperatures on thedriver and passenger sidescan be set independently.
Press the button once to acti-vate one side only. Pressagain to activate the other
side. Press the button a third time to activateboth sides.
The active side is indicated by the button's lightand in the display above the climate controlpanel.
When the car is started, the most recent settingis resumed.
NOTE
Heating or cooling cannot be hastened byselecting a higher or lower temperature thanthe actual desired temperature.
03 Climate control
Air distribution
03
98
Air distribution Use: Air distribution Use:
Air to windows. Some airflows from the air vents. Theair is not recirculated. Airconditioning is alwaysengaged.
to remove ice andmisting quickly.
Air to the floor and windows.Some air flows from the dash-board air vents.
to ensure comfortableconditions and gooddemisting in cold orhumid weather.
Air to windscreen and sidewindows. Some air flowsfrom the air vents.
to prevent mistingand icing in a cold andhumid climate. (Notfor low fan speed.)
Air to floor and from dash-board air vents.
in sunny weather withcool outside tempera-tures.
Airflow to windows and fromdashboard air vents.
to ensure good com-fort in warm, dryweather.
Air to floor. Some air flows tothe dashboard air vents andwindows.
to warm the feet.
Airflow to the head andchest from the dashboardair vents.
to ensure efficientcooling in warmweather.
Airflow to windows, fromdashboard air vents and tothe floor.
to provide cooler air forthe feet or warmer airto the upper body incold weather or hot,dry weather.
03 Climate control
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 99
General information about heaters
The parking heater heats the engine and pas-senger compartment and can be starteddirectly or with the timer.
Two different times can be selected using thetimer. Here, time refers to the time when the caris heated and ready. The car's electronic sys-tem calculates when heating should be startedbased on the outside temperature.
At -10 °C or lower the maximum running timeof the parking heater is 50 minutes.
WARNING
The car must be outdoors when the petrolor diesel heater is used.
NOTE
When the parking heater is active there maybe smoke from underneath the car, which isperfectly normal.
Refuelling
Warning decal on fuel filler flap.
WARNING
Fuel which spills out could be ignited.Switch off the fuel-driven heater before star-ting to refuel.
Check on the information display that theparking heater is switched off. When it isrunning, the information display showsPARK HEAT ON.
Parking on a hill
If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front ofthe car should point downhill to ensure thatthere is a supply of fuel to the parking heater.
Battery and fuel
If the battery has insufficient charge or the fuellevel is too low, the parking heater is switchedoff automatically and a message appears onthe information display.
– Acknowledge the message by pressing theindicator stalk READ button once.
IMPORTANT
Repeated use of the parking heater com-bined with short journeys may discharge thebattery and impair starting.
The car should be driven for the same timeas the heater is used to ensure that the car'sbattery is recharged adequately to replacethe energy consumed by the heater when itis used on a regular basis.
03 Climate control
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*
03
100 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Activating the heater
G029052
READ button
Thumbwheel1
RESET button1
Symbols and display messages
When one of the timer's settings orDirect start is activated, the infor-mation symbol in the combinedinstrument panel illuminates andthe information display shows an
explanatory text.
Display Specification
FUEL HEATER ON The heater isswitched on andrunning.
TIMER IS SET FOR
FUEL HEATER
Reminder that theheater will start atthe set time after thecar has been left,when the remotecontrol key isremoved from theignition switch.
Display Specification
HEATER STOP-
PED LOW BAT-
TERY
The heater has beenstopped by the car'selectronics in orderto facilitate startingthe engine.
HEATER STOP-
PED LOW FUEL
LEVEL
The heater has beenstopped by the car'selectronics in orderto facilitate startingthe engine as well as50 km driving.
Direct start and immediate stop
1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to DIRECT
START PARK HEAT OFF or DIRECT
START PARK HEAT ON.
2. Long presses on the RESET buttonchange between the two alternatives.
DIRECT START PARK HEAT ON: Parkingheater switched on manually or with pro-grammed timer.
DIRECT START PARK HEAT OFF: Parkingheater switched off.
1 No function in cars without trip computer, fuel-driven parking heater as well as stability and traction control system.
03 Climate control
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 101
With the direct start of the heater it will be acti-vated for 50 minutes.
Heating of the passenger compartment willbegin as soon as the engine coolant hasreached the correct temperature.
NOTE
The car can be started and driven while theparking heater is running.
Setting the timer
The time when the car shall be used and heatedis specified with the timer.
Select between TIMER 1 and TIMER 2.
1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to PARK
HEAT TIMER --:-- ON.
2. Give a long press (approx. 2 seconds) onthe RESET button in order to access theflashing time setting.
3. Select the required hour using the thumb-wheel.
4. Briefly press RESET to move to the flash-ing minutes setting.
5. Select the required minute using thethumbwheel.
6. Briefly press RESET to confirm the setting.
7. Press RESET to activate the timer.
After setting TIMER 1 a second start time canbe programmed with TIMER 2 by scrolling withthe thumbwheel.
Set the alternative time in the same way asTIMER 1.
Deactivating a timer-started heater
A timer-started heater can be switched offmanually before the set time has elapsed. Pro-ceed as follows:
1. Press the READ button.
2. Use the thumbwheel to scroll to the textPARK HEAT TIMER 1 or PARK HEAT
TIMER 2.
The text ON flashes on the display.
3. Press RESET.
The text OFF is shown with a constantglow and the heater is switched OFF.
A timer-started heater can be switched off inaccordance with the instructions in the section"Direct start and immediate stop".
Clock/timer
The heater's time is connected to the car'sclock.
NOTE
All timer programming will be cleared if thecar's clock is reset.
03 Climate control
Fuel-driven auxiliary heater* (diesel)
03
102 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Auxiliary heater (diesel)
In diesel-engined cars the auxiliary heater maybe required for achieving the correct tempera-ture in the engine and passenger compartmentduring cold weather.
The heater starts automatically when extraheat is required when the engine is running.
The heater is switched off automatically whenthe correct temperature is reached or when theengine is switched off.
NOTE
The auxiliary heater cannot be switched onor off manually but is only controlled by thecar's electronics.
When the auxiliary heater is active there maybe smoke from underneath the car, which isperfectly normal.
03 Climate control
03
103
104
Front seats............................................................................................ 106Interior lighting...................................................................................... 111Storage spaces in the passenger compartment................................... 114Rear seat............................................................................................... 118Cargo area............................................................................................ 120
INTERIOR
04 Interior
Front seats
04
106 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Seating position, manual seat
The driver's and passenger seats can beadjusted to the optimum sitting and drivingpositions.
Forward/backward: lift the handle to adjustthe distance to the steering wheel and ped-als. Check that the seat is locked afterchanging the position setting.
Raise/lower front edge of seat cushion,pump up/down.
Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down.
Lumbar support1, turn the wheel.
Backrest rake: turn the wheel.
Control panel for power seat*.
Lever (2) is not available on all seat models.
WARNING
Adjust the position of the driver's seat andadjust the seatbelt, see page 16, before set-ting off, never while driving.
Check that the seat is locked in position.
NOTE
When putting on the seatbelt it is easiest topick it up from down at the seatbelt guide,not over the shoulder.
Seating position, power seat*
G020199
The seats can be adjusted for a certain timeafter unlocking the door with the remote con-trol key without the key being inserted into theignition switch. The seat can always beadjusted in key position I or II.
Front edge of seat cushion up/down
Seat, forwards/backwards
Seat, up/down
Backrest rake
1 Also applies to power seat.
04 Interior
Front seats
04
107
An overload protection is deployed if one of theseats is blocked. If this happens, turn off theignition and wait a short time before adjustingthe seat again. Only one of the seat's settingscan be adjusted at a time.
Memory function
G020200
Buttons for memory function.
Store setting
1. Adjust seat.
2. Press and hold button M while pressingbutton 1, 2 or 3 simultaneously.
Using a stored setting
Press one of the memory buttons 1–3 until theseat stops. If you release the button then themovement of the seat will stop.
Emergency stop
If the seat accidentally begins to move, pressone of the setting buttons for the seat or mem-ory buttons in order to stop the seat.
WARNING
Risk of crushing. Make sure that children donot play with the controls.
Check that there are no objects in front of,behind or under the seat during adjustment.
Ensure that none of the rear seat passen-gers is in danger of becoming trapped.
Memory in remote control key
The settings for the driver's seat are stored inthe memory for the remote control key withwhich the car is locked. When the car isunlocked with the same remote control key thedriver's seat adopts the stored settings whenthe driver's door is opened.
NOTE
The remote control key memory is inde-pendent of seat memory.
Entry to rear seat, manual seat
Handle for lowering the backrest
Button for moving the power seat longitu-dinally
NOTE
No one may sit in the seat when it is pushedforward for entry into the rear seat.
NOTE
Lower the seat before it is pushed forward -otherwise there is a risk that the headrestraint makes contact with the sun visor.
04 Interior
Front seats
04
108
Push the seat forward
Release the seatbelt from the seatbeltguide, see also page 18.
Lift the handle
Fold the backrest forward to the lockedposition.
4. Push the seat forward.
Push the seat backward
Lift the handle and fold back the backrest.
2. Push the seat backward.
3. Adjust the seat longitudinally.
4. Refit the seatbelt in the seatbelt guide.
If the seat does not return to the same position,as before it was folded for entry, after havingbeen pushed back - then proceed as follows:
1. Sit down in the seat.
2. Lift the handle (1), see page 106, and pushthe seat to the rear end position.
04 Interior
Front seats
04
��
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 109
3. Continue to lift of the handle, and push theseat forward to the desired position andrelease the handle.
Entry to rear seat, power seat
Push the seat forward
Release the seatbelt from the seatbeltguide, see also page 18.
Lift the handle.
Fold the backrest forward to the lockedposition.
Hold down the front section of the button.
If the seat is set in a higher position - thenit will be lowered automatically to avoid thehead restraint making contact with the sunvisor.
04 Interior
Front seats
04
110 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Push the seat backward
Lift the handle and fold back the backrest.
Hold down the rear section of the button.
3. Refit the seatbelt in the seatbelt guide.
NOTE
The seat can only be moved to the very front(+6 cm) to facilitate entry and exit to andfrom the rear seat when the backrest hasbeen folded forward. If the backrest isfolded back when the seat is in the frontposition then the seat automatically movesback approx. 6 cm after a few seconds.
WARNING
Check that the backrest is properly foldedback by pushing and pulling the headrestraint.
The belt on the front passenger side must bein the belt guide during driving, even whenthere is no passenger sitting in the seat.
Inlaid mats*
Volvo supplies inlay mats which are especiallyproduced for your car.
WARNING
Before setting off check that the inlaid matin the driver area is firmly affixed andsecured in the pins in order to avoid gettingcaught adjacent to and under the pedals.
04 Interior
Interior lighting
04
��
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 111
Reading lamps and interior lighting
G020201
Controls in roof console for front reading lampsand passenger compartment lighting.
Reading lamp left-hand, On/Off
Interior lighting
Reading lamp right-hand, On/Off
All lighting in the passenger compartment canbe switched on in key position I and II as wellas when the engine is running. The lighting canalso be activated within 30 minutes after:
• the engine has been switched off and theremote control key is in position 0
• the car has been unlocked but the enginehas not been started.
Roof lighting
The reading lamps are switched on or off bypressing the relevant button in the roof con-sole.
Courtesy lighting
Courtesy lighting (and passenger compart-ment lighting) is switched on and off respec-tively when a side door is opened or closed.
Vanity mirror*
G020210
The lamp is automatically switched on and offrespectively when the cover is opened orclosed.
Glovebox lighting
Glovebox lighting is switched on and offrespectively when the lid is opened or closed.
Cargo area lighting
G007604
Passenger compartment lighting in rear seat andcargo area.
Apart from the passenger compartment light-ing the cargo area has a further lamp on its left-hand side.
The lighting in the passenger compartment andcargo area is switched on and off respectivelywhen the tailgate is opened or closed.
04 Interior
Interior lighting
04
112
Automatic lighting
Using the switch (2), see page 111, three posi-tions can be selected for the lighting the pas-senger compartment:
• Off – right-hand side (marked with 0)depressed, automatic lighting switchedoff.
• Neutral position – automatic lighting acti-vated. The dimmer function is active.
• On – left-hand side depressed, passengercompartment lighting on.
Neutral position
When the switch (2) is in neutral position pas-senger compartment lighting is switched onand off automatically in accordance with thebelow.
The passenger compartment lighting isswitched on and remains on for 30 seconds if:
• the car is unlocked with the remote controlkey or key blade.
• the engine is stopped and the remote con-trol key is turned to position 0.
Passenger compartment lighting is switchedoff when:
• the engine is started
• the car is locked with the key or remotecontrol key.
Passenger compartment lighting comes onand remains on for 5 minutes if one of the doorsis open.
If any lighting is switched on manually and thecar is locked then it will be switched off auto-matically after 5 minutes.
04 Interior
Interior lighting
04
113
04 Interior
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment
04
114
Storage spaces
04 Interior
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 115
Storage compartment in door panel.
Storage pocket on front edge of front seatcushions (trim dependent).
Ticket clip
Coat hanger, only for light garments.
Glovebox
Storage compartment (e.g. for CD discsand cup holder,*) and storage compart-ment behind the centre console.
Bottle holder*
Storage compartments in rear side panelswith space for up to three soda cans.
Storage compartment for first aid.
Storage pockets for maps and magazines.
WARNING
Ensure that no hard, sharp or heavy objectslie or protrude in such a way that they couldcause injury during heavy braking.
Always secure large and heavy objects witha seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.
Glovebox
G024208
The owner's manual and maps can be kepthere for example. There are also holders forcoins, pens and fuel cards.
The glovebox can be locked with the remotecontrol key's detachable key blade. Furtherinformation is available on page 127.
Coat hanger
The coat hanger is located on the passengerseat head restraint. Only hang light garmentson the hanger.
04 Interior
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment
04
116
Storage under the front armrest
G018371
There is a storage space under the armrest.There is also a smaller storage space in thedetachable armrest. Press the small buttonand lift the armrest to open the shallow com-partment. Press the large button and lift thearmrest to open the deeper compartment.
G026704
In the deeper compartment there is space for10 normal CD cases. The cases must be storedvertically on the top edge for all 10 to havespace.
Cup holder in centre console
G018372
There is space for a double cup holder underthe roller cover. The space can be used forstorage by lifting out the cup holder. Lift at therear edge of the cup holder where there is arecess.
If the cup holder is being fitted - first align itstwo guide lugs in the two recesses in the frontedge of the space and then press down therear edge of the cup holder.
Close the roller cover by gripping its front edgefrom below and pulling forward.
04 Interior
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 117
Storage compartment behind the gearlever
When there are no buttons for parking assis-tance and BLIS, see page 171 and page173, the space can be used as a storage com-partment.
WARNING
Objects placed in the storage compart-ments must not obstruct the parking brakelever when it is applied.
Bottle holder*
G017441
A bottle holder for larger bottles is located onthe rear of the tunnel console.
Ashtray*
G019622
An ashtray is located towards the rear of thetunnel console.
Open the ashtray by pulling the top edge of thecover.
Emptying the ashtray:
1. Press in the catch, see preceding illustra-tion, and tilt the cover up.
2. Then lift the ashtray out.
04 Interior
Rear seat
04
118
Head restraint, rear
All head restraints can be adjusted vertically tosuit the height of the passenger. The upperedge of the head restraint should be alignedwith middle of the back of the head. Raise thehead restraint as necessary.
To lower the head restraint, press the button bythe right-hand pillar at the same time as push-ing down the head restraint. To remove thehead restraint, the button by the right-hand pil-lar must be pressed while lifting out the headrestraint.
Lowering the rear seat backrest
IMPORTANT
There must be no objects on the rear seatwhen the backrest is to be folded down. Theseat belts must not be connected either.Otherwise there is a risk of damaging therear seat upholstery.
G009109
The rear seat backrests can be tipped forwardstogether, or individually, to make it easier totransport long objects.
Lowering the backrest
1. Pull the lock catch up and forward torelease the backrest. A red indicator (A)
shows that the backrest is no longer lockedin place.
2. Fold the backrest forward.
Raising the backrest
1. Fold up the backrest.
2. Place the seatbelt over the backrest.
3. Press the backrest backwards into lockedposition.
4. Check that the backrest is locked.
G007608
04 Interior
Rear seat
04
119
WARNING
Place the belt straps over the backrestsbefore folding them back to their securedpositions.
NOTE
When the backrest has been raised, the redindicator (A) should no longer be showing. Ifit is still showing then the backrest is notlocked in place.
Armrest in the rear seat
G009152
The armrest in the rear seat can be folded downfor passenger comfort or to make space for a
long load. The armrest folds down when one ofthe backrests is folded down.
For securing loads, see page 189.
04 Interior
Cargo area
04
120 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Soft cargo cover*
G007614
Soft cargo cover.
The cargo cover is pulled over the luggage andsecured in the rear load retaining eyelets. Undo(D) and if necessary (C) during loading.
Attaching the cargo cover
1. Hook in the hooks in the front load retainingeyelets by the floor (A).
2. Fit the front brackets in (B) by pressingtogether the spring-loaded rail and fit it intoplace on both sides.
3. Fit the rear brackets in (C) in the same way.
4. Hook in the hooks in the rear load retainingeyelets (D).
Hanging up the cargo cover when not in
use
1. Unhook the hooks from the rear loadretaining eyelets (D).
2. Press the rail together and remove it fromthe rear bracket (C). Place the rail at thefront of the cargo area floor.
3. Hook in the hooks in the rail next to themounting points (B).
The cargo cover now hangs next to the rearseat backrest ready for the next time it is to beused.
Removing the cargo cover
1. Unhook the hooks and remove one rail ata time by pressing them together andremoving them from their mounting points.
2. When all mounting points are detached thecargo cover can be rolled up and placed atthe rear of the cargo area floor to makespace for bulky loads.
NOTE
The cargo cover has no load-securing func-tion. Never load anything on top of the cargocover. For securing loads, see page 189.
Hard cargo cover*
G009475
Attaching the cargo cover
1. Retract all four lock plungers by pulling thelock buttons to their end positions beforelifting in the cargo cover into the cargoarea. The lock plungers stop in retractedposition.
2. Lift the cargo cover carefully into the cargoarea sideways, turn it back around andangle the front edge up slightly.
04 Interior
Cargo area
04
121
G007611
Locks and support pins.
3. Locate the front section of the two supportpins behind the active locks (A) on bothsides.
4. Align one of the rear locks at (B) and extendthe lock plunger by moving the lock buttonforwards.
5. Align the other rear lock in the same wayand extend the lock plunger by moving thelock button forwards.
6. Extend the front lock plungers, one at atime so that they lock in their active locks(A).
The cargo cover hatch can be raised duringloading.
NOTE
The cargo cover has no load-securing func-tion. Never load anything on top of the cargocover. For securing loads, see page 189.
Removing the cargo cover
1. Retract the front lock plungers at (A) to theirend positions by pulling back the lock but-tons on both sides.
2. Retract the rear lock plungers at (B) to theirend positions by pulling back the lock but-tons on both sides.
3. Lift up and turn the cargo cover before lift-ing it from the cargo area.
Raising the floor hatch
G014316
Without cargo cover
Raise the floor hatch and secure it in the lugson both sides.
With hard cargo cover
Raise the hatch on the cargo cover. Then raisethe floor hatch and hook it into the hooklocated under the cargo cover.
04 Interior
Cargo area
04
122 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Safety net*
G007603
The safety net is located behind the front seatbackrests. The safety net is only designed foruse when the rear seat backrests are lowered.For securing loads, see page 189.
Attaching the safety net
1. Fold down the backrests on both sides,see page 118.
2. Secure the safety net in the roof panelmountings.
3. Secure the hooks in the eyes at the seatbeltfloor mounting on both sides.
4. Stretch the straps if necessary.
5. Check all mountings.
Removing the safety net
1. Slacken the tension from the straps.
2. Undo the hooks from the eyes at the seat-belt floor mounting on both sides.
3. Detach the net from the mounting points inthe roof panels.
4. Fold up the safety net and store it in thebag.
WARNING
Loads in the cargo area must be firmlysecured even if the safety net is correctlyfitted.
Load retaining eyelets*
G007602
The load retaining eyelets are used to fastenstraps or nets to anchor items in the cargoarea.
There are two further eyelets on each side bythe seatbelt slide rail that can be used whensecuring loads when the safety net is not inuse.
For securing loads, see page 189.
04 Interior
04
123
124 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Remote control key with key blade....................................................... 126Active locks........................................................................................... 129Keyless drive*........................................................................................ 130Battery in remote control key................................................................ 133Locking and unlocking.......................................................................... 134Alarm*.................................................................................................... 137
LOCKS AND ALARM
05 Locks and alarm
Remote control key with key blade
05
126
Remote control key
The car is supplied with 2 remote control keys.
The remote control keys contain detachablemetal key blades for mechanical locking/unlocking of the driver's door and glovebox.
The key blades' unique code is available atauthorised Volvo workshops, which are rec-ommended for ordering new key blades.
A maximum of 6 remote control keys/keyblades can be programmed and used for onesingle car.
Turn signal indication during locking/unlocking
When the car is unlocked using the remotecontrol key or Keyless drive system, two shortflashes of the direction indicators serve to indi-cate that unlocking was correctly performed.
For locking, the indication takes place with onelong flash and only if all locks are locked, afterthe doors and the tailgate have been closed.
Personal preferences in the menu system canbe used to the deactivate indication via thedirection indicators. There will then be no visualindication as to whether the lock status is cor-rect, see page 82.
Loss of a remote control key
If you lose a remote control key, take the carand the other remote control keys to a Volvoworkshop - an authorised Volvo workshop isrecommended. The code of the missingremote control key must be erased from thesystem as a theft prevention measure.
Immobiliser
The remote control keys are fitted with codedchips. The code must be accepted by thereader (receiver) in the ignition switch. Theengine can only be started if the correct remotecontrol key with the correct code is used.
Remote control key functions
G019402
Locking – Locks all doors and the tailgate.Press and hold (at least 2 seconds) to alsoclose the side windows and the sunroof.
WARNING
If the sunroof and windows are closed usingthe remote control key, check that no one isin danger of getting hands caught.
05 Locks and alarm
Remote control key with key blade
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 127
Unlocking – Unlocks the doors and thetailgate. Press and hold (at least 4 seconds)to also open the side windows.
Approach lighting – Switches on the light-ing at a distance – lights up the area arounda car parked in a dark location. Press thebutton once to switch on the interior light-ing, position/parking lamps, number platelighting and door mirror lamps (option). Thelighting is switched off automatically after30, 60 or 90 seconds. For information onsetting the delay time, see page 82.
Tailgate – Press the button once to unlockthe tailgate only1.
Panic function – Used to attract attentionin an emergency. Press and hold the redbutton for at least 3 seconds or press it twice within 3 seconds to activate thedirection indicators and the horn. Thealarm can be deactivated with the samebutton, after having been armed for at least5 seconds. Otherwise the functionswitches off automatically after 30 sec-onds.
IMPORTANT
The narrow section of the remote controlkey is particularly sensitive - this containsthe chip. The engine cannot be started if thechip is damaged.
Detachable key blade
G019403
Using the remote control key's detachable keyblade:
• the driver's door can be opened manuallyif central locking cannot be activated withthe remote control key, see page 131.
• access to the glovebox can beblocked,see page 128.
• PACOS* activated/deactivated, seepage 22.
Removing the key blade
To remove the key blade from the remote con-trol key:
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side.
Pull out the key blade at the same time.
Attaching the key blade
Be careful when inserting the key blade into theremote control key.
1. Hold the remote control key with the nar-row end pointing down and lower the keyblade into its slot.
2. Lightly press the key blade to lock it inposition. You should hear a "click".
Unlocking doors with the key blade
If central locking cannot be activated with theremote control key, e.g. if the batteries are dis-charged, then the driver's door can beunlocked and opened as follows:
1 The function unlocks the boot lid – it does not open.
05 Locks and alarm
Remote control key with key blade
05
128
1. Insert the key blade in the driver's doorkeyhole.
2. Turn the blade 45 degrees clockwise andopen the door.
See also the figure and further information onpage 131.
NOTE
When the driver's door is unlocked using thekey blade and is opened, the alarm is trig-gered. It is switched off by inserting theremote control key in the ignition switch, seepage 138.
Locking the glovebox
G020034
The glovebox is locked.
The glovebox can only be locked/unlockedusing the remote control key's detachable keyblade. (For information on the key blade, seepage 127.)
Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock.
Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise.The keyhole is horizontal in the lockedposition.
Pull out the key blade.
– Unlocking takes place in reverse order.
NOTE
The remote control key cannot unlock theglovebox without the key blade.
This function is particularly useful for whenthe car is left for service, at a hotel or similar.
05 Locks and alarm
Active locks
05
129
G019405
Active locks for remote control key with
key blade.
Active locks for remote control key with-
out key blade.
05 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive*
05
130 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Keyless lock and ignition system
G007577
The keyless drive system allows the car to beunlocked, driven and locked without the needfor a key. You simply need to have the remotecontrol key with you in a pocket or a bag.
The system makes it easier and more conven-ient to open the car, for example with shoppingbags in one hand and a child in the other. Itsaves you having to take out or look for theremote control key.
The two remote control keys incorporate thekeyless drive function. You can order addi-tional remote controls. The keyless drive sys-tem can handle up to six remote controls.
Remote control key max. 1.5 m from the
car
In order to open a door or the tailgate, a remotecontrol key must be no more than approx.1.5 m from the car door handle or tailgate.
This means that the person who wishes toopen a door must have the remote control keywith him or her. It is not possible to open a doorif the remote control key is on the other side ofthe car.
The grey area in the illustration indicates therange covered by the system's antennas.
If someone leaves the car and takes a keylessdrive remote control key with them, a warningmessage appears on the information displayand a reminder signal sounds. The warningmessage disappears when the remote controlkey is brought back to the car or when the igni-tion dial is turned to position 0. The warning isonly issued if the ignition dial is in position I orII after someone has opened and closed adoor.
The warning message and reminder signal dis-appear when the remote control key is broughtback to the car after one of the followingactions:
• a door has been opened and closed
• the ignition dial has been turned to position0
• the READ button has been pressed.
Never leave any remote control key in the
car
If a remote control key with keyless drive func-tion is left in the car, it is made passive whenthe car is locked. This prevents unauthorisedentry.
If someone breaks into the car and finds theremote control key, it can be activated andused again. It is therefore important to handleall remote control keys with equal care.
Interference to remote control key
function
Electromagnetic fields and screening can inter-fere with the keyless drive system.
NOTE
Do not place/store the remote control keynear a mobile phone or metal object - nocloser than 10-15 cm.
If interference is experienced nonetheless, usethe remote control key and key blade in thenormal way, see page 126.
05 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive*
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 131
Locking
G020033
Cars with the keyless system have a button on theoutside door handles.
When the remote control key is within the rangecovered by the system's antennas, the doorsand the tailgate are locked as follows:
– Push in the lock button on one of the doorhandles.
All doors must be closed before the lock buttonis pushed in. Otherwise they will not lock.
When the car is locked, the lock buttons on theinside of the doors retract.
NOTE
On cars with the keyless drive system andautomatic transmission the gear selectormust be moved to the P position and theignition dial turned to the 0 position. Other-wise the car cannot be locked or alarmed.
Unlocking
When the remote control key is within the rangecovered by the system's antennas:
1. Open the doors by pulling the relevant han-dle.
2. Open the tailgate by pressing under thetailgate opening button and lift the tailgate.
If for some reason the keyless drive function inthe remote control key is not operating, the carcan be unlocked using the remote control keyfunctions, see page 126.
Power seat – remote control key with
memory function
If several people with keyless drive remotecontrol keys get into the car, then the driver'sseat will be adjusted for the person who opensthe door first.
Unlocking doors with the key blade
G020225
If central locking cannot be activated with theremote control key, e.g. if the batteries are dis-charged, then the driver's door can be openedas follows:
1. To access the keyhole: Carefully prize outthe plastic cover in the handle by insertingthe key blade in the hole on the bottom ofthe cover.
2. Unlock the door using the key blade.
05 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive*
05
132 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
NOTE
When the driver's door is unlocked using thekey blade and is opened, the alarm is trig-gered. It is switched off by inserting theremote control key in the ignition switch, seepage 138.
Antenna location
G020075
The keyless system has a number of integratedantennae located around the car:
Rear bumper, inside centre
Cargo area, central and furthest in underthe floor
Door handle, left
Centre console, under the rear section
Door handle, right-hand rear
Centre console, under the front section
WARNING
People with pacemaker operations shouldnot come closer than 22 cm to the keylesssystem's antennae with their pacemaker.This is to prevent interference between thepacemaker and the keyless system.
Personal preferences
The Keyless Drive system can have personalpreferences applied, see page 82.
05 Locks and alarm
Battery in remote control key
05
133
Low battery in remote control key
When the battery runs down and full function-ality cannot be guaranteed, the informationsymbol and display show KEY BATTERY
LOW VOLTAGE or REMOTE BATTERY
LOW VOLTAGE.
Changing the remote control keybattery
G019406
If the locks repeatedly fail to respond to signalsfrom the remote control key at a normal dis-tance, the battery should be replaced(type CR 2450, 3 V).
1. Place the remote control key with the key-pad downward and prize up the coverusing a small screwdriver.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Carefully examine how the battery's (+) and(–) sides are fitted (there is a diagram underthe cover).
4. Prize out and change the battery. Avoidtouching the battery and its terminals withyour fingers.
5. Refit the cover and press it in.> Dispose of the old battery in an environ-
mentally-responsible manner.
05 Locks and alarm
Locking and unlocking
05
134 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Locking/unlocking the car fromoutside
For cars with the Keyless system, seepage 130.
Unlocking
Using the remote control key's unlock buttonthe car can be unlocked in two different ways(select in personal settings, see page 82):
• One press unlocks the doors and the tail-gate
• One press unlocks the driver's door and asecond press unlocks the other doors andthe tailgate.
Locking
The remote control key's lock button locks thedoors and tailgate simultaneously.
NOTE
The car can be locked even if the tailgate isopen - when the tailgate is then closed thereis a risk that the keys will be locked in*.
WARNING
Be aware of the risk of being locked in thecar when it is locked from the outside usingthe remote control key - it is then not pos-sible to open any of the doors from theinside with the door controls. Read moreabout this in the section "Deadlocks" lateron.
Rapid closing
Press and hold (at least 2 seconds) on theremote control key's lock button to close allwindows and sunroof* at the same time.
Tailgate
Unlocking
Unlocking tailgate only:
– Press the remote control key's button tounlock the tailgate.
Locking
If the doors are locked when the tailgate isclosed then it remains unlocked. Lock with theremote control key's lock button or from insidewith the central locking button in order to lockboth doors and the tailgate.
Automatic relocking
If none of the doors or the tailgate is openedwithin 2 minutes of unlocking, all are lockedagain automatically (does not apply to lockingfrom inside). This function reduces the risk thatthe car is left unlocked unintentionally. (Forcars with alarm, see page 138.)
Locking/unlocking the car from inside
G007451
With the central locking button on the driver'sdoor, the doors and tailgate can be locked orunlocked simultaneously.
Unlocking
– Press the upper section of the central lock-ing button .
05 Locks and alarm
Locking and unlocking
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 135
Global opening
– Press the upper section of the central lock-ing button .
A long press (at least 4 seconds) alsoopens all the side windows simultaneously- for example, to quickly ventilate the pas-senger compartment during hot weather.
Locking
– Press the lower section of the central lock-ing button .
Press and hold (at least 2 seconds) to alsoclose all windows and the sunroof* at thesame time.
Opening the doors
When the doors are locked from the inside:
– Pull the handle twice to unlock and openthe door.
Automatic locking
When the speed of the car exceeds 7 km/h thedoors and tailgate are locked automatically.
When the function is activated and the doorshave been locked they can be opened in twoways:
• Pull one of the door handles twice
• Press the upper section of the central lock-ing button and pull the door handle.
The function can be activated/deactivated bymeans of personal preferences, see page 82.
Deadlocks*1
When deadlocked, the doors cannot beopened from the inside if they are locked withthe remote control key.
The deadlocks are activated with the remotecontrol key and are set after a 10-25 seconddelay after the doors have been locked.
The car can only be unlocked from a deadlockstate with the remote control key. The driver'sdoor can also be unlocked manually with theremote control key's detachable key blade -see page 127.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to remain in the carwithout first deactivating the deadlocks inorder to avoid the risk of anyone beinglocked in.
Temporary deactivation
If someone is going to stay in the car but thedoors must be locked from the outside, thenthe deadlocks function can be temporarilyswitched off.
1 Only in combination with alarm.
05 Locks and alarm
Locking and unlocking
05
136 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Active menu options are indicated with a cross.
Display
MENU
EXIT
ENTER
Navigation
Deactivation is carried out as follows:
1. Access the menu system under CAR
SETTINGS (for a detailed description ofthe menu system, see page 82).
2. Select REDUCED GUARD.
3. Select Activate once: The instrumentpanel display shows the messageREDUCED GUARD SEE MANUAL andthe deadlocks function is switched offwhen the car is locked.
or
Select Ask on exit: Each time the key isturned to position 0 the audio system dis-play shows the message Reduced guard
ask on exit Press ENTER to reduce
guard until engine is started Press EXIT
to cancel - select one of the options:
NOTE
• Remember that the alarm is activatedwhen the car is locked.
• If any of the doors are opened from theinside then the alarm is triggered.
• If the deadlocks function shall be switchedoff: Press ENTER and lock the car. Notethat the alarm's* movement and tilt detec-tors are switched off at the same time, seepage 138.
The next time the remote control key is turnedto key position II the system is reset to zero andthe instrument panel display shows the mes-sage FULL GUARD at which the deadlocksfunction and the alarm's movement and tiltdetectors* are re-engaged.
or
• If the locking system shall not be changed:Select no options at all and lock the car. Orpress EXIT and lock the car.
05 Locks and alarm
Alarm*
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 137
Alarm system
When the alarm is armed, it continually moni-tors all alarm inputs.
The alarm is triggered if:
• a door, the bonnet or tailgate opens
• a non-approved key is used in the ignitionor if an attempt is made to force the lock
• a movement is detected in the passengercompartment (if fitted with a movementdetector)
• the car is raised or towed away (if fittedwith a tilt detector)
• the battery's cable is disconnected
• anyone tries to disconnect the siren
• the rear window is broken.
Alarm indicator
G020227
A red LED on the top of the instrument panelindicates the alarm system's status:
• LED not lit – the alarm is not armed.
• The LED flashes once every other second– Alarm is armed.
• The LED flashes rapidly after disarming thealarm and until key position II is activated– the alarm has been triggered.
If there is a fault in the alarm system, a messageappears on the display. At which point youshould contact a workshop - an authorisedVolvo workshop is recommended.
NOTE
Do not attempt to repair or modify alarmsystem components. All such attemptscould affect the terms of insurance.
Arming the alarm
– Press the remote control key lock button.A long flash from the car's direction indi-cators confirms that the alarm is armedand that the doors are locked.
IMPORTANT
The alarm is fully armed when the car'sdirection indicators have made one longflash and the LED on the instrument panelflashes once every other second.
Disarming the alarm
– Press the remote control key unlock but-ton. Two short flashes from the car's direc-tion indicators confirm that the alarm isdisarmed and that the doors are unlocked.
05 Locks and alarm
Alarm*
05
138 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Automatic re-arming of the alarm
This function prevents the car being left withthe alarm disarmed unintentionally.
If the car is unlocked with the remote controlkey (and the alarm is disarmed) but none of thedoors or the tailgate is opened within 2minutes, then the alarm is automatically re-armed. The car is relocked at the same time.
Deactivating a triggered alarm
– Press the unlock button on the remotecontrol key or insert the key in the ignitionswitch.
Confirmation is given by two short flashes fromthe direction indicators.
If the remote control key's batteries are dis-charged then the alarm can be deactivated byunlocking the driver's door manually, insertingthe remote control key in the ignition switchand turning it to key position II.
Remote control key not working
G019420
If the alarm cannot be deactivated with theremote control key, e.g. if the key's battery isdischarged - the car can be unlocked, dis-armed and the engine started as follows:
1. Open the driver's door with the detachablekey blade. The alarm is triggered and thesiren sounds.
2. On cars with the keyless drive system: Firstremove the knob by pressing in thecatch (1) and pulling out (2).
3. Insert the remote control key in the ignitionswitch (3). The alarm is deactivated. Thealarm light flashes rapidly until the remotecontrol key is turned to key position II.
Alarm signals
When the alarm is triggered, the following hap-pens:
• A siren sounds for 25 seconds or until thealarm is deactivated. The siren has its ownbattery and works independently of the carbattery.
• The direction indicators flash for5 minutes or until the alarm is switched off.
Reduced alarm level
To avoid accidental triggering of the alarm -e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or duringtransport on a car train or car ferry - the move-ment and tilt detectors should be temporarilydeactivated.
The procedure is the same as with the tempo-rary disengaging of deadlocks - see page 135
Testing the alarm system
Testing the movement detector* in the
passenger compartment
1. Open all the windows.
2. Engage the alarm function with the remotecontrol key's lock button. Active alarmfunction is confirmed with a slowly flashingalarm indicator.
3. Please wait 30 seconds.
05 Locks and alarm
Alarm*
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 139
4. Test the movement detector by lifting outa bag from a seat for example.> A siren should sound and all direction
indicators should flash.
5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the carwith the remote control key.
Test of alarm for doors
1. Engage the alarm function with the remotecontrol key's lock button.
2. Please wait 30 seconds.
3. Unlock the driver's door with the detacha-ble key blade.
4. Open one of the doors.> A siren should sound and all direction
indicators should flash.
5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the carwith the remote control key.
Test of alarm for bonnet
1. Sit in the car and deactivate the movementdetector, see the previous section"Reduced alarm level".
2. Remain sitting in the car and engage thealarm function with the remote controlkey's lock button.
3. Please wait 30 seconds.
4. Open the bonnet with the handle under thedashboard.> A siren should sound and all direction
indicators should flash.
5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the carwith the remote control key.
140 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General.................................................................................................. 142Refuelling.............................................................................................. 144Alcolock*............................................................................................... 148Starting the engine................................................................................ 152Starting the engine – Flexifuel............................................................... 154Keyless drive*........................................................................................ 156Manual gearbox.................................................................................... 157Automatic gearbox................................................................................ 158DRIVe Start-Stop*................................................................................. 163Brake system........................................................................................ 167DSTC – Stability and traction control system*...................................... 169Park Assist*........................................................................................... 171BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System................................................ 173Towing and recovery............................................................................. 176Start assistance.................................................................................... 180Driving with a trailer.............................................................................. 181Towing equipment*............................................................................... 183Detachable towbar* ............................................................................. 185Loading................................................................................................. 189Adjusting headlamp pattern.................................................................. 190
STARTING AND DRIVING
06 Starting and driving
General
06
142 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Economical driving
Driving economically means driving smoothlywhile thinking ahead and adjusting your drivingstyle and speed to the prevailing conditions.
• Drive in the highest gear possible, adaptedto the current traffic situation and road -lower engine speeds result in lower fuelconsumption.
• Avoid driving with open windows.
• Avoid sudden unnecessary accelerationand heavy braking.
• Remove unnecessary items from the car -the greater the load the higher the fuel con-sumption.
• Use engine braking to slow down, when itcan take place without risk to other roadusers.
• A roof load and ski box increase air resis-tance, leading to higher fuel consumption- remove the load carriers when not in use.
• Do not run the engine to operating tem-perature at idling speed, but rather drivewith a light load as soon as possible - acold engine consumes more fuel than awarm one.
• Cars with the D2 engine and 6-speed man-ual transmission with Start/Stop* arestarted in 2nd gear under normal condi-tions on level ground.
For more information and further advice, seethe pages 13 and 296.
WARNING
Never switch off the engine while moving,such as downhill, this deactivates importantsystems such as the power steering andbrake servo.
Driving in water
The car can be driven through water at a maxi-mum depth of 25 cm at a maximum speed of10 km/h. Extra caution should be exercisedwhen passing through flowing water.
IMPORTANT
Engine damage can occur if water entersthe air filter.
In greater depths, water can enter the trans-mission. This reduces the lubricating abilityof the oils and shortens the service life of thesystems.
When driving in water, maintain a low speedand do not stop the car. When the water hasbeen passed, depress the brake pedal lightlyand check that full brake function is achieved.Water and mud for example can make the
brake linings wet resulting in delayed brakefunction.
• Clean the electric contacts of the electricengine block heater and trailer couplingafter driving in water and mud.
IMPORTANT
Do not let the car stand with water over thesills for any long period of time. This couldcause electrical malfunctions.
In the event of stalling in water, do not try torestart. Tow the car from the water.
Engine, gearbox and cooling system
Under special conditions, for example harddriving in hilly terrain and hot climate, there isa risk that the engine and drive system mayoverheat - in particular with a heavy load.
For supplementary information about over-heating when driving with a trailer - seepage 181.
• Remove any auxiliary lamps from in frontof the grille when driving in hot climates.
• In the event of a risk of overheating a built-in protection function in the gearbox is acti-vated which, amongst other things, illumi-nates the instrument panel's yellow infor-mation lamp and there is a text message
06 Starting and driving
General
06
143
displayed there regarding appropriateaction - follow the recommendation given.
• If the temperature gauge for the engine'scooling system goes into the red zone -stop and let the engine idle for a fewminutes.
• If the car overheats, the air conditioningmay be switched off temporarily.
• Do not turn the engine off immediately youstop after a hard drive.
NOTE
It is normal for the engine's cooling fan tooperate for a while after the engine has beenswitched off.
Diesel engine
When driving under heavy load in a hot climate,the engine cooling fan can be replaced withone of a greater capacity than the standardmodel1. Check with your nearest Volvo dealerregarding the options for your car.
Open tailgate
WARNING
Do not drive with the tailgate open. Toxicexhaust fumes can be drawn into the carthrough the cargo area.
Do not overload the battery
The electrical functions in the car load the bat-tery to varying degrees. Avoid having theremote control key in key position II when theengine is switched off. Instead use the I mode- which uses less power.
Note that the 12 volt outlet in the cargo areasupplies power even when the remote controlkey has been removed from the ignition switch.
Also, be aware of different accessories thatload the electrical system. Do not use functionswhich use a lot of power when the engine isswitched off. Examples of such functions are:
• ventilation fan
• windscreen wiper
• audio system (high volume)
• headlamps.
If the battery voltage is low the information dis-play shows the text LOW BATTERY POWER
SAVE MODE. The energy-saving functionthen shuts down certain functions or reducescertain functions such as the ventilation fanand/or audio system.
– In which case, charge the battery by star-ting the engine and then running it for atleast 15 minutes - battery charging is moreeffective during driving than running theengine at idling speed while stationary.
Slippery driving conditions
Practise driving on slippery surfaces undercontrolled conditions to learn how the carreacts.
1 For certain engines.
06 Starting and driving
Refuelling
06
144
Opening the fuel filler flap
Don not forget to switch off the fuel-driven heaterbefore refuelling!
Open the fuel filler flap with the button on thelighting panel, see page 59. The engine mustbe switched off before the flap can be opened.The fuel flap is located on the rear right wing.
Closing
Push in the flap until you hear a click.
Fuel cap
1. Turn the fuel cap until an obvious resis-tance is felt.
2. Turn past the resistance until it comes to astop.
3. Take out the cap.
4. Hang up the cap on the inside of the fuelfiller flap.
NOTE
Put the petrol cap back on after refuelling.Turn until one or more clear clicks are heard.
Filling up with fuel
Do not overfill the tank but fill until the pumpnozzle cuts out.
NOTE
Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hotweather.
Fuel of a lower quality than that specifiedshould not be used as engine power and fuelconsumption could be negatively affected, formore information see the following sectionFuel.
General information on fuel
WARNING
Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and get-ting fuel splashes in the eyes.
In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove anycontact lenses and rinse the eyes in plentyof water for at least 15 minutes and seekmedical attention.
Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol,bioethanol and mixtures of them and dieselare highly toxic and could cause permanentinjury or be fatal if swallowed. Seek medicalattention immediately if fuel has been swal-lowed.
WARNING
Fuel which spills on to the ground can beignited by the exhaust fumes.
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before star-ting to refuel.
Never carry an activated mobile phonewhen refuelling. The ring signal could causespark build-up and ignite petrol fumes,leading to fire and injury.
06 Starting and driving
Refuelling
06
145
IMPORTANT
Mixing different types of fuel or the use offuel not recommended invalidates Volvo'sguarantees, and any associated serviceagreement. This applies to all engines.NOTE: It does not apply to cars with enginesthat are adapted to run on ethanol fuel (E85).
For information on fuel consumption, CO2
emissions and tank volume - see page 296.
Catalytic converter
The purpose of the catalytic converter is topurify exhaust gases. It is located in the flow ofexhaust gases close to the engine so that itquickly reaches operating temperature. Thecatalytic converter consists of a monolith(ceramic or metal) with channels. The channelwalls are lined with a thin layer of platinum/rho-dium/palladium. These metals act as catalysts,i.e. they participate in and accelerate a chem-ical reaction without being used up them-selves.
Lambda-sondTM oxygen sensor
The Lambda-sond is part of a control systemintended to reduce emissions and improve fueleconomy.
An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen contentof the exhaust gases leaving the engine. Thisvalue is fed into an electronic system that con-
tinuously controls the injectors. The ratio of fuelto air directed to the engine is continuouslyadjusted. These adjustments create optimalconditions for efficient combustion of harmfulemissions (hydrocarbons, carbon monoxideand nitrous oxides) using the three-way cata-lytic converter.
Petrol
Petrol must meet the EN 228 standard. Mostengines can be run with octane ratings of 91,95 and 98 RON.
• 91 RON must not be used for 4-cylinderengines and should only be used in excep-tional cases with other engines.
• 95 RON can be used for normal driving.
• 98 RON is recommended for optimum per-formance and minimum fuel consumption.
When driving in temperatures above +38 °C,fuel with the highest possible octane rating isrecommended for optimum performance andfuel economy.
IMPORTANT
• Always refuel with unleaded petrol so asnot to damage the catalytic converter.
• Do not use additives not recommendedby Volvo.
Bioethanol E85
Do not modify the fuel system or its compo-nents, and do not replace components withparts that are not specifically designed for usewith bioethanol.
WARNING
Methanol must not be used. A decal on theinside of the fuel filler flap shows the correctalternative fuel.
The use of components not designed forbioethanol engines could cause fire, injuryor engine damage.
Reserve fuel can
The reserve fuel can should be filled with petrol,see the NOTE box, page 154.
IMPORTANT
Make sure the reserve fuel can is securelyfastened and that its cap is sealed.
WARNING
Ethanol is sensitive to sparks, and explosivegases could form in the reserve fuel can if itis refuelled with ethanol.
06 Starting and driving
Refuelling
06
146
Diesel
Diesel must meet the EN 590 or JIS K2204standards.
IMPORTANT
Only ever use fuel that fulfils the Europeandiesel standard.
IMPORTANT
Diesel type fuels which must not be used:special additives, Marine Diesel Fuel, fueloil, RME1 (Rape Methyl Ester) and vegetableoil. These fuels do not fulfil the requirementsin accordance with Volvo recommendationsand generate increased wear and enginedamage that is not covered by the Volvowarranty.
Diesel engines are sensitive to contaminants,such as excessively high volumes of sulphurparticles for example. Only use diesel fuel fromwell-known producers. Never use diesel ofdubious quality.
At low temperatures (-40 °C to -6 °C), a paraffinprecipitate may form in the diesel fuel, whichmay lead to ignition problems. Special dieselfuel designed for low temperatures aroundfreezing point is available from the major oil
companies. This fuel is less viscous at low tem-peratures and reduces the risk of paraffin pre-cipitate.
IMPORTANT
Use special winter grade fuel during coldmonths.
The risk of condensation in the fuel tank isreduced if the tank is kept well filled. Whenrefuelling, check that the area around the fuelfiller pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto thepaintwork. Wash off any spillage with deter-gent and water.
IMPORTANT
The sulphur content must be a maximum of50 ppm.
Empty tank
The design of the fuel system in a diesel enginemeans that if the vehicle runs out of fuel, thetank may need to be vented in the workshop inorder to restart the engine after fuelling.
Once the engine has stopped due to fuel star-vation, the fuel system needs a few momentsto carry out a check. Do this before starting the
engine, once the fuel tank has been filled withdiesel:
1. Insert the remote control key in the ignitionswitch and turn to key position II (seepage 152).
2. Wait approx. 1 minute.3. To start the engine: Depress the brake and/
or clutch pedal, and turn the remote controlkey to start position III.
Draining condensation from the fuel filter
The fuel filter separates condensation from thefuel. Condensation can disrupt engine opera-tion.
The fuel filter must be drained at the intervalsspecified in the Service and Warranty Bookletor if you suspect that the car has been filledwith contaminated fuel.
IMPORTANT
Certain special additives remove the waterseparation in the fuel filter.
Diesel particle filter (DPF)
Diesel cars may be equipped with a particle fil-ter, which results in more efficient emissioncontrol. The particles in the exhaust gases arecollected in the filter during normal driving. So-
1 Diesel fuel may contain a certain amount of RME, but further amounts must not be added.
06 Starting and driving
Refuelling
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 147
called "regeneration" is started in order to burnaway the particles and empty the filter. Thisrequires the engine to have reached normaloperating temperature.
Regeneration of the filter takes place automat-ically and normally takes 10-20 minutes. It maytake a little longer at a low average speed. Fuelconsumption may increase slightly duringregeneration.
The rear window heating may be activatedautomatically to increase the load on theengine during regeneration without warning.
Regeneration in cold weather
If the car is frequently driven short distances incold weather then the engine does not reachnormal operating temperature. This means thatregeneration of the diesel particle filter doesnot take place and the filter is not emptied.
When the filter has becomeapproximately 80% full of particles, the yellowinformation symbol on the instrument panelilluminates, and the message SOOT FILTER
FULL SEE OWNER MANUAL is shown on theinstrument panel display.
Start regeneration of the filter by driving the caruntil the engine reaches normal operating tem-perature, preferably on a main road or motor-way. The car should then be driven for approx-imately 20 minutes more.
NOTE
A smaller reduction of engine power may benoticed temporarily during regeneration.
When regeneration is complete the message iscleared automatically.
IMPORTANT
If the filter fills up it may be incapable offunctioning. Then it can be difficult to startthe engine and there is a risk that the filterwill have to be replaced.
Use the parking heater* in cold weather so thatthe engine reaches normal operating tempera-ture more quickly.
06 Starting and driving
Alcolock*
06
148 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General information on the Alcolock
The function of the Alcolock1 is to prevent thecar from being driven by individuals under theinfluence of alcohol. Before the engine can bestarted the driver must take a breath test thatverifies that he/she is not under the influenceof alcohol. Alcolock calibration takes place inaccordance with each market's limit value inforce for driving legally.
WARNING
The Alcolock is an aid and does not exemptthe driver from responsibility. It is always theresponsibility of the driver to be sober andto drive the car safely.
Functions
1. Nozzle for breath test.2. Switch.3. Transmission button.4. Lamp for battery status.5. Lamp for result of breath test.6. Lamp indicates ready for breath test.
Operation
Battery
Alcolock indicator lamp (4) shows battery sta-tus:
Indicator lamp(4)
Battery status
Green flashing Charging in pro-gress
Green Fully charged
Yellow Semi-charged
Red Discharged - fit thecharger in the holderor connect thepower supply cablefrom the glovebox.
NOTE
Store the Alcolock in its holder. This willkeep the built-in battery fully charged andthe Alcolock is activated automaticallywhen the car is opened.
1 Also called Alcoguard.
06 Starting and driving
Alcolock*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 149
Before starting the engine
The Alcolock is activated automatically and isthen ready for use when the car is opened.
1. When the indicator lamp (6) is green theAlcolock is ready for use.
2. Withdraw the Alcolock from its holder. Ifthe Alcolock is outside the car when it isunlocked then it must first be activatedwith the switch (2).
3. Fold up the nozzle (1), take a deep breathand blow with an even pressure until a"click" is heard after approx. 5 seconds.The result will be one of the alternatives inthe following table Result after breath
test.4. If no message is shown then the transmis-
sion to the car may have failed - in whichcase, press the button (3) to transmit theresult to the car manually.
5. Fold down the nozzle and refit the Alcolockin its holder.
6. Start the engine following an approvedbreath test within 5 minutes - otherwise itmust be repeated.
Result after breath test
Indicator lamp(5) + Display text
Specification
Green lamp +ALCOGUARD
APPROVED TEST
Start the engine - noalcohol contentmeasured.
Yellow lamp +ALCOGUARD
APPROVED TEST
Engine starting pos-sible - measuredalcohol content isabove 0.1 promillebut below the limitvalue in forceA.
Red lamp + DISAP-
PROVED TEST
WAIT 1 MINUTE
Engine starting notpossible - measuredalcohol content isabove the limit valuein forceA.
A Limits vary between countries, so find out what limits apply.See also the section entitled General information on theAlcolock on page148.
NOTE
After a completed period of driving, theengine can be restarted within 30 minuteswithout a new breath test.
To bear in mind
Before the breath test
In order to obtain correct function and as accu-rate a measurement result as possible:
• Avoid eating or drinking approx.5 minutes before the breath test.
• Avoid excess windscreen washing - thealcohol in the washer fluid may result in anincorrect measurement result.
Change of driver
In order to ensure that a new breath test is car-ried out in the event of a change of driver -depress the switch (2) and the send button (3)simultaneously for approx. 3 seconds. Atwhich point the car returns to start inhibitionmode and a new approved breath test isrequired before starting the engine.
Calibration and service
The Alcolock must be checked and calibratedat a workshop2 every 12 months.
30 days before recalibration is necessary thedisplay shows ALCOGUARD CALIBR.
REQUIRED. If calibration is not carried outwithin these 30 days then normal engine star-ting will be blocked - only starting with the
2 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
06 Starting and driving
Alcolock*
06
150 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Bypass function will then be possible, seepage 150 section Emergency situation.
The message can be cleared by pressing thesend button (3) once. Otherwise it goes out onits own after approx. 2 minutes but then reap-pears each time the engine is started - onlyrecalibration at a workshop2 can clear the mes-sage permanently.
Cold or hot weather
The colder the weather the longer it takesbefore the Alcolock is ready for use:
Temperature (ºC) Maximum heat-ing time (sec-
onds)
+10 to +85 10
-5 to +10 60
-40 to -5 180
At temperatures below -20 ºC or above+60 ºC the Alcolock requires additional powersupply. The display shows ALCOGUARD
INSERT POWER CABLE. In which case, con-nect the power supply cable from the gloveboxand wait until indicator lamp (6) is green.
In extremely cold weather the heating time canbe reduced by taking the Alcolock indoors.
Emergency situation
In the event of an emergency situation or theAlcolock is out of order, it is possible to bypassthe Alcolock in order to drive the car.
NOTE
All Bypass activation is logged and saved inmemory, see page 10 in the section,Recording data.
After the Bypass function has been activatedthe display shows ALCOGUARD BYPASS
ENABLED the whole time while driving andcan only be reset by a workshop2.
The Bypass function can be tested without theerror message being logged - in which case,carry out all the steps without starting the car.The error message is cleared when the car islocked.
When the Alcolock is installed, either theBypass or Emergency function is selected asthe bypassing option. This setting can bechanged afterwards at a workshop2.
Activating the Bypass function
• Depress and hold the left-hand stalkswitch READ button and the button forhazard warning flashers simultaneously forapprox. 5 seconds - the display first showsBYPASS ACTIVATED WAIT 1 MINUTE
and then ALCOGUARD BYPASS
ENABLED - after which the engine can bestarted.
This function can be activated several times.The error message shown during driving canonly be cleared at a workshop2.
Activating the Emergency function
• Depress and hold the left-hand stalkswitch READ button and the button forhazard warning flashers simultaneously forapprox. 5 seconds - the display showsALCOGUARD BYPASS ENABLED andthe engine can be started.
This function can be used once, after which areset must be made at a workshop2.
2 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
06 Starting and driving
Alcolock*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 151
Symbols and display messages
In addition to the previously described mes-sages, the combined instrument panel's dis-play can also show the following:
Display text Meaning/Action
ALCOGUARD
RESTART POSSI-
BLE
The engine has beenswitched off for lessthan 30 minutes -engine starting pos-sible without newtest.
ALCOGUARD
SERVICE
REQUIRED
Contact a work-shop2.
ALCOGUARD NO
SIGNAL
Transmission failed -send manually withbutton (3) or take anew breath test.
ALCOGUARD
INVALID TEST
Test failed - take anew breath test.
ALCOGUARD
BLOW LONGER
Blowing too short -blow for longer.
ALCOGUARD
BLOW SOFTER
Blowing too hard -blow more gently.
Display text Meaning/Action
ALCOGUARD
BLOW HARDER
Blowing too weak -blow harder.
ALCOGUARD
WAIT PREHEAT-
ING
Heating not finished- wait for textALCOGUARD
BLOW 5 SEC-
ONDS.
2 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
06 Starting and driving
Starting the engine
06
152 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Before starting the engine
– Apply the parking brake.
Note that if the car is equipped with an alcolockthen a breath test must first be approvedbefore the engine can be started, seepage 148.
Automatic gearbox
– Move the gear selector in position P or N.
Manual gearbox
Put the gear lever in neutral and hold the clutchpedal fully depressed. This is particularlyimportant in very cold conditions.
WARNING
Never remove the remote control key fromthe ignition switch while driving or when thecar is being towed. The steering lock couldotherwise be activated, making it impossi-ble to steer the car.
The remote control key must be in key posi-tion II when the car is being towed.
NOTE
The idling speed can be noticeably higherthan normal for certain engine types duringcold starting. This is in order that the emis-sions system can reach normal operatingtemperature as quickly as possible, whichminimises exhaust emissions and protectsthe environment.
Starting the engine
IMPORTANT
If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts -wait for 3 minutes before making a furtherattempt. Starting capacity increases if thebattery is allowed to recover.
Petrol
– Turn the remote control key to key positionIII. If the engine does not start within5–10 seconds, release the key and tryagain.
Diesel
1. Turn the remote control key to key positionII.> An indicator symbol in the combined
instrument panel shows that engine pre-heating is underway, see page 51.
2. Turn the ignition key to position III whenthe indicator symbol goes out.
Autostart *
With the autostart function, there is no need tohold the remote control key (or ignition dial, oncars with Keyless Drive - see page 130) in keyposition III until the engine has started.
– Turn the key to key position III and releaseit - the starter motor then works automati-cally until the engine has started.
NOTE
If the diesel engine is started in extreme coldwithout waiting for engine preheating, thenthe automatic start sequence can bedelayed for a couple of seconds.
Key positions
0 – Locked position
The steering lock is activatedwhen the remote control keyis removed from the ignitionswitch.
06 Starting and driving
Starting the engine
06
153
I – Radio position
Steering lock deactivated.Certain functions can beused. The engine's electricalsystem is not activated.
II – Driving position
The remote control key'sposition when driving. Thewhole electrical system isengaged.
III – Start position
The starter motor is activated.The remote control key isreleased when the engine hasstarted and then springs backto drive position.
A ticking sound can be heardif the key reaches an intermediate position - inwhich case, turn the key to position II and backto get rid of the sound.
When the steering lock is activated
If the front wheels are positioned so that thereis tension in the steering lock then the infor-mation display may show a warning message
and the car cannot be started. In which case,proceed as follows:
1. Remove the remote control key from theignition switch and turn the steering wheelso that the tension is released.
2. Hold the steering wheel in this position.Reinsert the key and make a new attemptto start the car.
WARNING
Never remove the remote control key fromthe ignition switch while driving or when thecar is being towed. The steering lock wouldbe activated, making it impossible to steerthe car.
WARNING
Always remove the remote control key fromthe ignition switch when leaving the car,especially if there are children in the car.
Remote control keys and electronicimmobiliser
The remote control key must not hang withother keys or metal objects on the same keyring. The electronic immobiliser could be acti-vated accidentally.
06 Starting and driving
Starting the engine – Flexifuel
06
154 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General information about startingwith Flexifuel
The engine is started in the same way as in apetrol-engined car, see page 152.
NOTE
The immobiliser is activated in the event ofrepeated start attempts. Before a new startattempt is made the key/dial must first beturned back to position I or 0.
In the event of starting difficulties
If the engine does not start at the first startattempt, proceed as follows:
1. Depress the accelerator pedal 1/3 to 1/2.
2. Turn the remote control key/ignition dial tokey position III.
3. When the engine has started, ease theaccelerator pedal gradually as the enginespeed increases.
If the engine has not started after
10 seconds, second attempt
– Turn the remote control key/ignition dial tokey position III until the engine starts, butnot longer than 60 seconds.
If the engine still does not start
– Please wait for one minute, fully depressthe accelerator pedal and repeat the pre-vious procedure.
IMPORTANT
If the engine does not start despite repeatedstart attempts, contact a workshop - anauthorised Volvo workshop is recom-mended.
Engine block heater*
Electrical input to the engine block heater.
When the temperature is expected to be lowerthan –10 °C and the car has been refuelled with
bioethanol E85, an engine block heater shouldbe used for about 2 hours to facilitate the quickstarting of the engine.
The lower the temperature, the longer the timerequired with the engine block heater. At-20 °C the heater should be used for approx. 3hours.
Cars intended for E85 have an electric engineblock heater*. Starting and driving with a pre-heated engine involves significantly loweremissions and reduced fuel consumption. Forthis reason you should aim to use the engineblock heater throughout the winter months.
WARNING
The engine block heater is powered by highvoltage. Fault tracing and repair of an elec-tric engine block heater and its electricalconnections must only be carried out by aworkshop - an authorised Volvo workshopis recommended.
06 Starting and driving
Starting the engine – Flexifuel
06
155
NOTE
Points to remember for carrying reservefuel:
• In the event of stalling due to an emptyfuel tank, bioethanol E85 from a reservefuel can may make the engine difficultto start in extreme cold. This is avoidedby filling the reserve fuel can with 95octane petrol.
For more information on Flexifuel's bioethanolE85 fuel, see page 145.
Fuel adaptation
If the fuel tank is filled with petrol after the carhas been driven on bioethanol E85 (or viceversa) then the engine may run slightlyunevenly for a time. For this reason it is impor-tant to allow the engine to accustom itself(adapt) to the new fuel mixture.
Adaptation takes place automatically when thecar is driven for a short period at an evenspeed.
IMPORTANT
After the fuel mixture in the tank has beenchanged an adaptation should be made bydriving at an even speed for about 15minutes.
If the battery has been discharged or discon-nected then a slightly longer period of drivingis required for the adaptation as the memoryfor the electronics has been cleared.
06 Starting and driving
Keyless drive*
06
156 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
G019410
The keyless drive system allows the car to beunlocked, driven and locked without the needfor a key, see page 130.
The ignition switch ignition dial is used in thesame way as the remote control key. One pre-condition for starting the car is that the car'sremote control key is located inside the pas-senger compartment or the cargo area.
Starting the car
– Depress the clutch pedal (cars with manualgearbox) or brake pedal (cars with auto-matic gearbox).
Petrol engine
– Press in and turn the ignition dial to keyposition III.
Diesel engine
1. First turn the ignition dial to key position IIand wait until the diesel indicator symbol inthe combined instrument panel goes out,see page 51.
2. Following which, turn the ignition dial toposition III.
Starting with the remote control key
G019420
If the remote control key's battery is dis-charged then the Keyless Drive function doesnot work. In which case, start the car by usingthe remote control key as ignition dial.
1. Press in the catch in the ignition dial.
2. Pull the ignition dial out from the ignitionswitch.
3. Insert the remote control key into the igni-tion switch and start in the same way aswith the ignition dial.
06 Starting and driving
Manual gearbox
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 157
Gear positions
Gearshift pattern 5-speed gearbox.
Gearshift pattern 6-speed gearbox.
The 6-speed box is available in two versions -reverse gear position differs between them.Look at the actual gearshift pattern imprintedon the gear lever.
• Depress the clutch pedal fully during eachgear change.
• Take your foot off the clutch pedal betweengear changes.
WARNING
Get into the habit of always applying theparking brake when parking on a slope - anengaged gear is not sufficient to hold the carin all situations.
Gear shift indicator - GSI*
GSI - Gear Shift Indicator -advises the driver of the opti-mum time to change gear.The indication is given with anarrow for up and down shift-ing respectively in the lowerinformation display of the
combined instrument panel, see page 49.
Reverse gear inhibitor
The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibil-ity of mistakenly attempting to engage reversegear during normal forward travel.
• Start from neutral position N and onlyengage reverse gear R when the car is sta-tionary.
NOTE
With the upper variant of the shifting patternfor 6-speed gearbox (see previous illustra-tion) - first press down the gear lever in theN position in order to engage reverse gear.
06 Starting and driving
Automatic gearbox
06
158
Geartronic automatic gear positions
G018264
D: Automatic gear positions. M (+/–): Manual gearpositions.
The information display shows the position ofthe gear selector using the following indica-tions: P, R, N, D, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6, seepage 49.
P – Parking position
Select position P when you wish to start theengine or park the car.
IMPORTANT
The car must be stationary when positionP is selected.
NOTE
The brake pedal must be depressed in orderto be able to disengage the gear lever fromthe P position.
The gearbox is mechanically blocked whenthe P position is engaged. Always apply theparking brake when parking the car.
WARNING
Get into the habit of always applying theparking brake when parking on a slope - theautomatic transmission's P position is notsufficient to hold the car in all situations.
R – Reverse
The car must be stationary when position R isselected.
N – Neutral
No gear is engaged and the engine can bestarted. Apply the parking brake when the caris stationary with the gear selector in posi-tion N.
NOTE
The brake pedal must be depressed in orderto be able to disengage the gear lever fromthe N position if the car has been stationaryfor more than 3 seconds.
D – Drive
D is the normal driving position. The car auto-matically shifts up and down depending on thelevel of acceleration and speed. The car mustbe stationary when the gear selector is movedto position D from position R.
Geartronic manual gear positions (+/-)
The driver can also change gear manuallyusing the Geartronic automatic gearbox. Thecar engine-brakes when the accelerator pedalis released.
Manual gearshift mode is obtained by movingthe lever to the side from position D to the endposition at +/–. The information display shiftsthe indication from D to one of the figures 1 –6, which is equivalent to the gear that isengaged just then, see page 49.
• Move the lever forwards towards + (plus)to change up a gear and release it, the leverreturns to its rest position between + and–.
or
• Pull the lever back towards – (minus) tochange down a gear and release it.
The manual gearshift mode (+/–) can beselected at any time while driving.
Geartronic automatically shifts down if thedriver allows the speed to decrease lower than
06 Starting and driving
Automatic gearbox
06
��
159
a level suitable for the selected gear, in orderto avoid jerking and stalling.
To return to automatic driving mode:
• Move the lever to the side to the end posi-tion at D.
Kick-down
When the accelerator pedal is pressed all theway to the floor (beyond the position normallyregarded as full acceleration) a lower gear isimmediately engaged. This is known as kick-down.
If the accelerator is released from the kick-down position, the gearbox automaticallychanges up.
Kick-down is used when maximum accelera-tion is needed, such as for overtaking.
Safety function
To prevent overrevving the engine, the gearboxcontrol program has a protective downshiftinhibitor which prevents the kick-down func-tion.
Geartronic does not permit downshifting/kick-down which would result in an engine speedhigh enough to damage the engine. Nothinghappens if the driver still tries to shift down inthis way at high engine speed – the originalgear remains engaged.
When kick-down is activated the car canchange one or more gears at a time dependingon engine speed. The car changes up when theengine reaches its maximum speed in order toprevent damage to the engine.
Mechanical gear selector inhibitor
G020237
The gear selector can be moved forward andback freely between N and D. Other positionsare locked with a latch that is released with theinhibitor button on the gear selector.
With the inhibitor button depressed the levercan be moved forwards or backwards betweenP, R, N and D.
Automatic gear selector inhibitor
Cars with an automatic gearbox have specialsafety systems:
Keylock
To remove the remote control key, the gearselector must be in the P position. The key islocked in all other positions.
Parking position (P)
Stationary car with engine running:
– Hold your foot on the brake pedal whenmoving the gear selector to another posi-tion.
Electric gear inhibitor – Shiftlock Parking
position (P position)
To be able to move the gear selector from theP position to other gear positions, the remotecontrol key must be in position II and the brakepedal must be depressed.
Shiftlock – Neutral (N position)
If the gear selector is in the N position and thecar has been stationary for at least three sec-onds (irrespective of whether the engine is run-ning) then the gear selector is locked in the Nposition.
To be able to move the gear selector from theN position to another gear position, the brakepedal must be depressed and the remote con-trol key must be in position II.
06 Starting and driving
Automatic gearbox
06
160 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor
G018263
In certain cases, it may be necessary to movethe car when it is not driveable, for example ifthe battery is flat. Proceed as follows to movethe car:
1. There is a small cover behind P-R-N-D onthe gear selector panel. Open it at the rearedge.
2. Fully insert the key blade from the remotecontrol key.
3. Hold the key blade down and at the sametime move the gear lever out of the P posi-tion.
Cold start
When starting in low temperatures, the gearchanges can sometimes feel hard. This is dueto the gearbox oil's viscosity at low tempera-tures. To reduce engine emissions, the gear-box shifts up later than normal when the engineis started at low temperatures.
NOTE
Depending on the engine temperature whenthe engine is started, the idle speed after acold start may be higher than normal forcertain engine types.
Automatic gearbox Powershift*
G018264
D: Automatic gear positions. M (+/–): Manual gearpositions.
Powershift is a six-stage automatic gearboxthat has double mechanical clutch discs incontrast to a conventional automatic gearbox.A conventional automatic gearbox has ahydraulic torque converter instead that trans-fers power from engine to gearbox.
Powershift transmission operates in the sameway and has similar controls and functions asthe Geartronic automatic transmission, descri-bed in the previous section.
In the event of uncertainty as to whether or notthe car is equipped with Powershift transmis-sion, this can be verified by checking the des-
06 Starting and driving
Automatic gearbox
06
161
ignation on the decal number (5) under thebonnet - see page 284. The designa-tion ”MPS6” means that it is Powershift trans-mission - otherwise it is Geartronic automatictransmission.
To bear in mind
The transmission's double clutch has overloadprotection that is activated if it becomes toohot, e.g. if the car is held stationary with theaccelerator pedal on an uphill gradient for along time.
Overheated transmission causes the car toshake and vibrate, and the warning symbol illu-minates and the information display shows amessage. The transmission can also overheatduring slow driving in queues (10 km/h or
slower) on an uphill gradient, or with a trailerhitched. The transmission cools down whenthe car is stationary, with foot brake depressedand the engine running at idling speed.
Overheating during slow driving in queues canbe avoided by driving in stages: Stop the carand wait with your foot on the brake pedal untilthere is a moderate distance to the trafficahead, drive forward a short distance, and thenwait another moment with your foot on thebrake pedal.
IMPORTANT
Use the foot brake to hold the car stationaryon an uphill gradient - do not hold the carwith the accelerator pedal. The gearboxcould then overheat.
For important information regarding Powershifttransmission and towing - see page 176.
Text message and action
In some situations the display can show a mes-sage at the same time as a symbol is illumi-nated.
The table shows three steps with an increaseddegree of seriousness should the gearboxbecome too hot. In parallel with the display textthe driver is also advised that the car's elec-tronics are temporarily changing the drivingcharacteristics. Follow the instructions on theinformation display where appropriate.
06 Starting and driving
Automatic gearbox
06
162
Symbol Display Driving characteristics Action
TRANSM. OVERHEAT BRAKE TO
HOLD
Difficulty in maintaining even speed at con-stant engine speed.
Gearbox overheated. Keep the car station-ary using the foot brakeA.
TRANSM. OVERHEAT PARK SAFELY Significant pulling in the car's traction. Gearbox overheated. Park the car immedi-ately in a safe manner.
TRANSM. COOLING LET ENGINE RUN No drive due to overheated gearbox. Gearbox overheated. For fastest cooling:Run the engine at idling speed with the gearlever in the N or P position until the mes-sage clears.
A For fastest cooling: run the engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position, until the message clears.
NOTE
The table's examples are no indication thatthe car is defective but instead show that asafety function has been activated inten-tionally to prevent damage to one of thecar's components.
WARNING
If a warning symbol combined with the textTRANSM. OVERHEAT PARK SAFELY isignored then the heat in the gearbox maybecome so high that the power transmis-sion between engine and gearbox is tem-porarily halted in order to prevent the clutchfrom malfunctioning - the car then losesdrive and is stationary until gearbox tem-perature has cooled to an acceptable level.
For more possible display messages with theirrespective proposals for solutions concerningautomatic transmission, see page 54.
A display text clears automatically after theaction has been carried out or after one presson the indicator stalk READ button.
06 Starting and driving
DRIVe Start-Stop*
06
��
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 163
General
Quieter and cleaner
Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corpo-ration's core values and it influences all of ouroperations. This target-orientation has resultedin the DRIVe vehicle series whose conceptconsists of an interaction between several sep-arate energy-saving functions, all with thecommon purpose of reducing fuel consump-tion, which in turn contributes to reducedexhaust emissions.
Start/Stop
In addition to being equipped with a reliableand fuel-efficient diesel engine, this car'sengine is equipped with a Start and Stop func-tion which comes into action in the event of e.g.stationary traffic queues or waiting at trafficlights - see the detailed description on the nextpage.
The engine's automatic restart sequence runsso smoothly that it is hardly noticeable that theengine has actually been switched off. Theexperience is that the engine has been runningthe whole time but with an extremely quiet andlow idling speed.
The Start/Stop function gives the driver theopportunity for a more active environmentallyconscious driving style by means of being ableto disengage gear and letting the engine auto-stop, whenever appropriate.
Smart charging
The car's kinetic energy is used during enginebraking by means of it being converted intoelectricity and stored in the car's battery.
Adapted power steering
Another DRIVe function is that the power steer-ing's energy take-off is adapted according torequirements. By means of optimisation andthe introduction of an energy saving functionthe energy take-off can be minimised on occa-sions where power assistance (help in turningthe steering wheel) is not necessary.
Aerodynamics
The DRIVe concept also includes a loweredchassis, front and rear spoilers with low windresistance, as well as specially developedwheel rims1.
1 The range varies depending on the market.
06 Starting and driving
DRIVe Start-Stop*
06
164 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Function and operation
On/Off button and display text AUTO START-STOP ON.
The Start/Stop system is activated automati-cally when the engine is started with the key.The driver is made aware of this function bymeans of the On/Off button's green lamp beingilluminated.
NOTE
After starting with the key and each auto-stop the car must first reach 5 km/h beforethe automatic Start/Stop function is re-acti-vated - following which certain conditionsmust also be fulfilled, refer to these underthe heading "The engine does not auto-stop".
All of the car's normal systems such as lighting,radio, etc. work as normal even with an auto-stopped engine, except that some equipmentmay have its function temporarily reduced, e.g.the climate control system's fan speed orextremely high volume on the audio system.
Auto-stopping the engine
In order for the engine to stop automatically thecar must be stationary - however, theStart/Stop function does accept slow rolling,the equivalent to normal walking pace:
• Set the gear lever in neutral position andrelease the clutch pedal - the engine stopsautomatically.
The display text ENGINE IN
AUTO START, and the but-ton's illuminated green lamp,reminds - and indicates - thatthe engine has been auto-stopped.
Auto-starting the engine
With the gear lever in neutral position:
• Depress the clutch pedal - the enginestarts automatically.
or
• Depress the accelerator pedal - the enginestarts automatically.
On a downhill gradient there is also the optionto start the engine automatically as follows:
• Release the foot brake and allow the car tomove off - the engine starts automaticallywhen the speed exceeds normal walkingpace.
After starting the engine:
• Engage a suitable gear and continue thejourney.
Gear indicator
An essential detail in connection with environ-mental driving is to drive in the right gear andto change gear in time.
The driver is assisted by anindicator which notifies thedriver when it is most advan-tageous to engage the nexthigher or lower gear - GSI(Gear Shift Indicator).
06 Starting and driving
DRIVe Start-Stop*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 165
Indication is made with an up or down arrow inthe combined instrument panel's lower dis-play.
Deactivating the Start/Stop function
The information display shows here that the Start/Stop function has been disengaged.
In certain situations, it mayadvisable to temporarilyswitch off the automaticStart/Stop function - this iscarried out by pressing thisbutton once, at which pointthe button's lamp goes out.
Disengaged Start/Stop function is indicated bya message appearing on the information dis-play for about 5 seconds.
The Start/Stop function is disengaged until it isreactivated with the button or until the nexttime the engine is started with the key.
Limitations
The engine does not auto-stop
Even if the Start/Stop function is activated, theengine does not auto-stop if:
• the driver has opened the seatbelt'sbuckle.
• the car has not stopped completely.
• the car has been reversed and reverse gearis disengaged.
• the engine does not have normal operatingtemperature.
• outside temperature is below freezingpoint or above approx. 30 °C.
• the environment in the passenger com-partment differs from the preset values -indicated by the ventilation fan running ata high speed.
• the capacity of the battery is below theminimum permissible level.
• battery temperature is below freezing pointor above approx. 55 °C.
The engine auto-starts without driver
intervention
An auto-stopped engine may restart in somecases without the driver having decided thatthe journey should continue. In the followingcases the engine auto-starts even if the driver
has not depressed the clutch pedal in order toengage a gear:
• The driver's seatbelt buckle is opened.
• Misting forms on the windows.
• The outside temperature is below freezingpoint or above approx. 30 °C.
• There is a temporarily high current take-offor battery capacity has dropped below thelowest permissible level.
• The car starts to roll - faster than the equiv-alent normal walking pace.
• Repeated pumping of the brake pedal.
WARNING
Do not open the bonnet when the enginehas stopped automatically - the engine maysuddenly start automatically. In order toavoid starting automatically with raisedbonnet:
• Engage a gear and apply the parkingbrake.
The engine does not auto-start
In the following cases the engine does notauto-start after having auto-stopped:
• The driver's seatbelt buckle has beenopened - a display text prompts the driverto start the engine normally.
• A gear is engaged without declutching - adisplay text prompts the driver to set the
06 Starting and driving
DRIVe Start-Stop*
06
166 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
gear lever in neutral position in order toenable auto-start.
Involuntary engine stop
In the event that a start-up fails and the enginestops, proceed as follows:
1. Depress the clutch pedal again - the enginestarts automatically after the gear lever hasbeen set in neutral position. Prior to this theinformation display showed the text PUT
GEAR IN NEUTRAL TO START.
Text message
In combination with this indicatorlamp the Start/Stop function maydisplay text messages on the infor-mation display for certain situa-tions. A recommended action
should be performed for some of them. Thefollowing table shows some examples.
Message
AUTO START-
STOP ON
Illuminates forabout 5 secondsafter Start/Stop hasbeen activated.
AUTO START-
STOP OFF
Illuminates forabout 5 secondsafter Start/Stop hasbeen switched off.
Message
TURN KEY TO
START
The engine will notauto-startA - per-form a normal startusing the key.
PUT GEAR IN
NEUTRAL TO
START
Set the gear lever inneutral positionB.
DEPRESS
CLUTCH PEDAL
TO START
The engine is readyto auto-start - wait-ing for declutching.
AUTO START-
STOP SERVICE
REQUIRED
Start/Stop functiondisengaged. A work-shop should be con-tacted.
A Occurs if the seatbelt is unbuckled after the engine has auto-stopped, for example.
B Occurs if a gear is engaged without declutching after theengine has auto-stopped.
If a message does not go out after performingan action a workshop should be contacted - anauthorised Volvo workshop is recommended,which also applies in the event of the need forany other form of technical assistance.
06 Starting and driving
Brake system
06
167
Brake servo
If the car is rolling or is being towed with theengine turned off, the brake pedal must bedepressed about 5 times harder than when theengine is running. If the brake pedal isdepressed when the engine is started, you willfeel the pedal drop. This is normal and due tothe brake servo becoming active. This may bemore noticeable if the car has EmergencyBrake Assistance (EBA).
WARNING
The brake servo only works when the engineis running.
NOTE
If braking with the engine switched off,press the brake pedal sharply once, notrepeatedly.
Brake circuits
This symbol illuminates if a brakecircuit is not working.
If a fault should occur in one of thecircuits, it is still possible to brake
the car. The brake pedal will travel further andmay feel softer than normal. Harder pressureon the pedal is needed to produce the normalbraking effect.
Dampness can affect braking
characteristics
Brake components become wet when the caris driven in heavy rain, through pools of wateror when the car is washed. This may alter brakepad friction characteristics so that there is adelay before braking effect is noticed.
Press the brake pedal lightly from time to timeif driving for long stretches in rain or slushysnow, as well as after setting off in very dampor cold weather. This warms up the brake padsand dries off any water. This precaution is alsorecommended before parking the car for a longperiod in such weather conditions.
If the brakes are used heavily
When driving in the Alps or other roads withsimilar characteristics, the car's brakes areheavily loaded even if the brake pedal is notbeing depressed especially hard.
Because speed is often low, the brakes are notcooled as effectively as when driving on flatroads at higher speed.
So as not to overload the brakes, shift downwhen driving downhill instead of using the footbrake. Use the same gear driving downhill asyou would use driving uphill. This uses enginebraking more efficiently so the foot brake isonly required for brief periods.
Bear in mind that driving with a trailer puts anadditional load on the car's brakes.
Anti-lock braking system - ABS
The anti-lock braking system(ABS) prevents the wheels fromlocking up during braking.
This means the ability to steer ismaintained and it is easier to swerve to avoid ahazard for example.
After the engine has been started, the ABS willperform a brief self-test at a speed ofabout 20 km/h. This can be felt and heard aspulses in the brake pedal.
To get the most out of the ABS:
1. Depress the brake pedal with full force.Pulses will be felt.
2. Steer the car in the direction of travel. Donot release the pressure on the pedal.
Practice braking with the ABS system in a traf-fic-free area and in different weather condi-tions.
06 Starting and driving
Brake system
06
168
Emergency Brake Assistance – EBA
For sudden braking, EBA (Emergency BrakeAssist) provides full-strength braking instanta-neously. The EBA function senses when heavybraking is underway by registering how quicklythe brake pedal is depressed.
Continue braking without easing off on thebrake pedal. The function disengages whenthe pressure on the brake pedal eases.
This function is always active. It cannot be dis-engaged.
WARNING
If the BRAKE and ABS warning symbols illu-minate at the same time, there may be afault in the brake system. If the level in thebrake fluid reservoir is normal at this stage,drive carefully to the nearest workshop andhave the brake system checked - an author-ised Volvo workshop is recommended.
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in thebrake fluid reservoir, do not drive furtherbefore topping up the brake fluid.
The reason for the loss of brake fluid mustbe investigated.
NOTE
When EBA is activated the brake pedal low-ers slightly more than usual, depress (hold)the brake pedal as long as necessary. If thebrake pedal is released then all brakingceases.
Emergency brake lights and automatic
hazard warning flashers
Emergency brake lights are activated to alertvehicles behind about sudden braking. Thefunction means that the brake light flashesinstead of - as in normal braking - shining witha constant glow.
Emergency brake lights are activated atspeeds above 50 km/h if the ABS system isworking and/or in the event of sudden braking.After the car's speed has been slowed below10 km/h the brake light returns from flashing tothe normal constant glow - while at the sametime the hazard warning flashers are activated,and they flash until the driver changes enginespeed with the accelerator pedal or they aredeactivated with their button, see page 71.
06 Starting and driving
DSTC – Stability and traction control system*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 169
General
The stability and traction control system, DSTC(Dynamic Stability and Traction Control) helpsthe driver to avoid skidding and improves thecar's traction.
A pulsing sound may be noticed during brakingor acceleration when the system is in action.The car may accelerate slower than expectedwhen the accelerator pedal is depressed.
Active Yaw Control
The function limits the driving and brake forceof the wheels individually in order to stabilisethe car.
Spin Control
The function prevents the driving wheels fromspinning against the road surface during accel-eration.
Traction control system
The function is active at low speed and trans-fers power from the driving wheel that is spin-ning to the one that is not.
Reduced operation
G029057
Controls and information display.
Thumbwheel1
RESET button1
The stability system is activated automaticallyeach time the car is started.
System operation during skidding and accel-eration can be partially deactivated. Operationduring skidding is then delayed and so allowsmore skidding which provides greater freedomfor dynamic driving. Traction in deep snow orsand is improved at the same time as acceler-ation is no longer limited.
Operation
1. Turn the thumbwheel until the DSTC menuappears.
DSTC ON means that the system functionis unchanged.
DSTC SPIN CONTROL OFF means thatsystem operation is reduced.
2. Press and hold the RESET button until theDSTC menu is changed.
The system remains reduced until thedriver reactivates it or until the engine isswitched off - after the engine is started thenext time DSTC is back in its normal modeagain.
WARNING
Suppressing system function may alter thedriving characteristics of the car.
NOTE
DSTC ON is shown for several seconds onthe display each time the engine is started.
1 No function in cars without trip computer, fuel-driven parking heater as well as stability and traction control system.
06 Starting and driving
DSTC – Stability and traction control system*
06
170 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Messages on the information display
TRACTION CONTROL TEMPORARILY
OFF means that the system has been tempo-rarily reduced due to excessive brake tempera-ture.
– The function is reactivated automaticallywhen the brakes have cooled.
ANTI-SKID SERVICE REQUIRED systemdisabled due to a fault.
– Stop the car in a safe place and turn off theengine.> If the message remains when the engine
is restarted, drive to a workshop. Anauthorised Volvo workshop is recom-mended.
Symbols in the combined instrumentpanel
DSTC system
Information
If the symbols and are displayed at thesame time:
• Read the message on the information dis-play.
If the symbol appears alone then it mayappear as follows:
• Flashing light means that the DSTC systemis now being activated.
• Constant glow for 2 seconds means sys-tem check when the engine is started.
• Constant glow after starting the engine orwhile driving means that there is a fault inthe DSTC system.
06 Starting and driving
Park Assist*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 171
General information on parkingassistance
Parking assistance front and rear.
Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking.A signal indicates the distance to a detectedobstacle.
WARNING
Parking assistance does not relinquish thedriver's own responsibility during parking.The sensors have blind spots where obsta-cles cannot be detected. Be aware of chil-dren or animals near the car.
Variants
Parking assistance is available in two variants:
• Rear only.
• Both front and rear.
Function
The frequency of the signal increases theshorter the distance to an obstacle, in front ofor behind the car. If the volume of anotheraudio source from the audio system is high,then this is automatically lowered.
The tone becomes constant at a distance ofabout 30 cm. If there are obstacles within thisdistance both behind and in front of the car, thesignal alternates between left and right-handspeakers.
Rear parking assistance only
The system is automatically engaged when thecar is started.
Rear parking assistance is activated whenreverse gear is engaged and the message Park
Assist active EXIT to deactivate is shown onthe audio system's display.
If the system is switched off, the display showsPark Assist deactivated ENTER to
activate as soon as reverse gear is engaged.To change the settings, see page 82.
The distance covered behind the car isabout 1.5 metres. The signal comes from therear loudspeakers.
Limitations
The system must be deactivated when revers-ing with a trailer, or bike carrier on the towbaror similar. Otherwise the trailer or bike carrierwould trigger the sensors.
NOTE
Rear parking assistance is deactivatedautomatically when towing a trailer if a Volvogenuine trailer cable is used.
Parking assistance both front and rear
Button for Off/On (button location depends onother selected equipment).
06 Starting and driving
Park Assist*
06
172 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The system is automatically engaged when thecar is started and the switch's On/Off lamp isilluminated. If parking assistance is switchedoff with the button, the lamp goes out.
Front
Front parking assistance is active at speedsbelow 15 km/h. The system is deactivated athigher speeds. When the speed is below10 km/h the system is reactivated.
The distance covered to the front of the car isabout 0.8 metres. The signal for obstacles infront comes from the front loudspeakers.
Limitations
Front parking assistance cannot be combinedwith extra lights because the sensors are affec-ted by the extra lights.
Rear
Rear parking assistance is activated whenreverse gear is engaged.
The distance covered to the rear of the car isabout 1.5 metres. The signal for obstaclesbehind comes from the rear loudspeakers.
Limitations
See the previous section Rear parking assis-tance only.
Fault indicator
If the information symbol illumi-nates with constant glow and thedisplay shows PARK ASSIST
SERVICE REQUIRED then park-ing assistance is disengaged. For
attention, contact a workshop - an authorisedVolvo workshop is recommended.
IMPORTANT
In certain conditions the parking assistancesystem may produce incorrect warning sig-nals that are caused by external soundsources that emit the same ultrasonic fre-quencies that the system works with.
Examples of such sources include horns,wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes andexhaust noises from motorcycles etc.
Cleaning the sensors
Parking assistance sensors.
The sensors must be cleaned regularly toensure that they work properly. Clean themwith water and car shampoo.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors maycause incorrect warning signals.
06 Starting and driving
BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 173
General
G020295
Rearview mirror with BLIS system.
BLIS camera
Indicator lamp
BLIS symbol
WARNING
The system is a supplement to, not areplacement for, a safe driving style and useof the rearview mirrors. It can never replacethe driver's attention and responsibility. Theresponsibility for changing lanes safelyalways rests with the driver.
BLIS is an information system that under cer-tain conditions can help to draw the driver'sattention to vehicles moving in the same direc-tion in the so-called "blind spot".
The system is designed to work most effec-tively when driving in dense traffic on multi-lanehighways.
BLIS is based on camera technology. The cam-eras (1) are located under the door mirrors.
When a camera has detected a vehicle insidethe blind spot zone the indicator lamp (2) illu-minates with a constant glow.
NOTE
The lamp illuminates on the side of the carwhere the system has detected the vehicle.If the car is overtaken on both sides at thesame time then both lamps illuminate.
BLIS advises the driver with a message if a faultarises in the system. If for example the sys-tem's cameras are obscured then the BLISindicator lamp flashes and a message is shownin the information display. In such cases, checkand clean the lenses. If necessary, the systemcan be switched off temporarily by pressing theBLIS button see page 174.
Blind spots
A = approx. 3.0 m, B = approx. 9.5 m.
When BLIS operates
The system operates when the car is driven ata speed above 10 km/h.
Overtaking
The system is designed to react if you overtakeanother vehicle at a speed of up to 10 km/hfaster than the other vehicle.
The system is designed to react if you are over-taken by a vehicle travelling up to 70 km/hfaster than your vehicle.
06 Starting and driving
BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System
06
174 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
WARNING
BLIS does not work in sharp bends.
BLIS does not work when the car is revers-ing.
A wide trailer coupled to the car can concealother vehicles in adjacent lanes. It can pre-vent the vehicle in the screened area frombeing detected by BLIS.
Daylight and darkness
In daylight the system reacts to the shape ofthe surrounding vehicles. The system isdesigned to detect motor vehicles such ascars, trucks, buses and motorcycles.
In darkness the system reacts to the head-lamps of surrounding vehicles. Vehicles withheadlamps that are switched off are notdetected by the system. This means for exam-ple that the system does not react to a trailerwithout headlamps which is towed behind acar or truck.
WARNING
The system does not react to cyclists ormoped riders.
The BLIS cameras have limitations similar tothose of the human eye, i.e. they do not seeas well in e.g. heavy snowfall, strongoncoming light or thick fog.
Activate/deactivate
Button for Off/On (button location depends onother selected equipment).
BLIS is activated when the engine is started.The indicator lamps in the door panels flashthree times when BLIS is activated.
The system can be deactivated/activated bypressing the BLIS button.
When BLIS is deactivated the light in the buttongoes out and a text message is shown on theinstrument panel display.
When BLIS is activated the light in the buttonilluminates, a new text message is shown onthe display and the indicator lamps in the doorpanels flash three times. Press the READ but-
ton to clear the text message. For more infor-mation on messages, see page 54.
BLIS system message
Text on the dis-play
Specification
BLIS ON The BLIS system isactivated.
BLIS REDUCED
FUNCTION
Reduced function indata transmissionbetween the BLISsystem's cameraand the car's electri-cal system.
The camera resetsitself when the datatransmissionbetween the BLISsystem's cameraand the car's electri-cal system returns tonormal.
BLIS CAMERA
BLOCKED
One or both cam-eras blocked - cleanthe lenses.
06 Starting and driving
BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 175
Text on the dis-play
Specification
BLIS SERVICE
REQUIRED
Blind spot syst. dis-engaged - contact aworkshop.
BLIS OFF The BLIS system isdeactivated.
IMPORTANT
Repair of the BLIS system componentsmust only be performed by a workshop - anauthorised Volvo workshop is recom-mended.
Cleaning
In order to work most effectively the BLIS cam-era lenses must be clean. The lenses can becleaned with a soft cloth or damp sponge.Clean the lenses carefully so that they are notscratched.
IMPORTANT
The lenses are electrically heated to melt iceor snow. If necessary, brush snow awayfrom the lenses.
Limitations
In some situations the BLIS indicator lamp mayilluminate despite there being no other vehiclewithin the blind spot.
NOTE
If the BLIS indicator lamp illuminates on iso-lated occasions despite there being noother vehicle within the blind spot then thisdoes not mean that a fault has arisen in thesystem.
In the event of a fault in the BLIS system thedisplay shows the text BLIS SERVICEREQUIRED.
Here are several examples of situations wherethe BLIS indicator lamp may illuminate even ifthere is no other vehicle within the blind spot.
Reflection from shiny wet road surface.
G018177
Own shadow on large, light, smooth surface, e.g.noise barrier or concrete road surface.
Low sun in the camera.
06 Starting and driving
Towing and recovery
06
176
Start assistance
Use a donor battery if the battery is dischargedand the engine does not start. Do not tow thecar to bump start the engine, see page 180.
IMPORTANT
Bump starting the car can damage the cat-alytic converter.
Towing
Find out the statutory maximum speed limit fortowing before towing begins.
1. Turn the remote control key to position IIand unlock the steering lock so that the carcan be steered, see page 153.
2. The key must remain in the ignition switchwhile the car is being towed.
3. Keep the towline taut when the towingvehicle reduces speed by holding your footgently pressed on the brake pedal -thereby avoiding unnecessary jerking.
4. Be prepared to brake to stop.
WARNING
• The steering lock must be unlockedbefore towing - the lock stays in theposition it was in when the voltage wasdisconnected.
• The remote control key must be in keyposition II - in position I all airbags aredeactivated.
• Never remove the key from the ignitionswitch when the car is being towed.
NOTE
If the car is de-energised then the steeringlock must be unlocked using a donor bat-tery before towing can be started.
WARNING
The brake servo and power steering do notwork when the engine is switched off. Thebrake pedal must be pressed about fivetimes harder than normal, and the steeringwill be considerably heavier than normal.
Manual gearbox
Prior to towing:
– Move gear lever into neutral and releasethe parking brake.
Automatic gearbox Geartronic
Prior to towing:
– Move the gear selector to position N andrelease the parking brake.
IMPORTANT
Note that the car must always be towed withthe wheels rolling forward.
• Cars with automatic gearbox must notbe towed at speeds above 80 km/h orfurther than 80 km.
Automatic gearbox Powershift
The model with Powershift transmissionshould not be towed as it is dependent on theengine running in order to receive sufficientlubrication. If towing still has to take place, theroute must be as short as possible and thenwith very low speed.
In the event of uncertainty as to whether or notthe car is equipped with Powershift transmis-sion, this can be verified by checking the des-ignation on the decal number (5) under thebonnet - see page 284. The designation"MPS6" means that it is Powershift transmis-sion - otherwise it is Geartronic transmission.
06 Starting and driving
Towing and recovery
06
177
IMPORTANT
Avoid towing.
• However, the car can be towed for ashort distance at low speed to move itfrom a dangerous position - not furtherthan 10 km and not faster than10 km/h. Note that the car must alwaysbe towed with the wheels rolling for-ward.
• In the event of moving a longer distancethan 10 km, the car must be transportedwith the drive wheels raised from theroad - professional recovery is recom-mended.
Prior to towing:
– Move the gear selector to position N andrelease the parking brake.
06 Starting and driving
Towing and recovery
06
178
Towing eye
The towing eye is screwed into a threadedsocket behind a cover on the right-hand sideof the bumper, front or rear.
Fitting the towing eye
Take out the towing eye (1) that is locatedunder the floor hatch in the cargo area.
The cover for the towing eye's attachmentpoint is available in two variants whichmust be opened in different ways:
• Open the variant with a recess using acoin or similar inserted in the recess,
turning it outwards. Then turn out thecover completely and remove it.
• The second variant has a marking alongone side or in a corner: Press the mark-ing with a finger and fold out the oppo-site side/corner at the same time usinga coin or similar - the cover turns aroundits axis and can then be removed.
Screw the towing eye right in up to itsflange. Turn in the towing eye firmly e.g.using the wheel wrench.
After use, unscrew the towing eye andreturn it to its place.
Finish by refitting the cover onto thebumper.
IMPORTANT
The towing eye is only designed for towingon roads - not for pulling the car unstuck orout of a ditch. Call a recovery service forrecovery assistance.
06 Starting and driving
Towing and recovery
06
179
NOTE
On certain cars with fitted towbar the towingeye cannot be secured in the rear mounting.In which case, secure the tow rope in thetowbar.
For this reason it is advisable to store thetowbar's towball in the car, see page 183.
Recovery
Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.
The car must always be towed with the wheelsrolling forward.
IMPORTANT
Cars with automatic gearbox must only betowed with drive wheels raised from theroad.
06 Starting and driving
Start assistance
06
180
Starting with a donor battery
If the battery is flat then the car can be startedwith current from another battery.
When jump starting the car, the following stepsare recommended to avoid short circuits orother damage:
1. Turn the remote control key to key position0.
2. Check that the donor battery has a voltageof 12 V.
3. If the donor battery is installed in anothercar - switch off the donor car's engine andmake sure that the two cars do not toucheach other.
4. Connect one of the red jump lead's clampsto the donor battery's positive terminal (1).
IMPORTANT
Connect the start cable carefully to avoidshort circuits with other components in theengine compartment.
5. Connect the red jump lead's other clamponto the car's positive terminal (2).
6. Connect one of the black jump lead'sclamps to the donor battery's negative ter-minal (3).
7. Fit the other clamp to a grounding point,such as by the left-hand spring strut (4).
8. Check that the jump lead clamps areaffixed securely so that there are no sparksduring the starting procedure.
9. Start the engine of the "donor car" andallow it to run a few minutes at a speedslightly higher than idle approx. 1500 rpm.
10. Start the engine in the car with the dis-charged battery.
IMPORTANT
Do not touch the crocodile clips during thestart procedure. There is a risk of sparksforming.
11. Remove the jump leads in reverse order -first the black and then the red.> Make sure that none of the black jump
lead's clamps comes into contact withthe battery's positive terminal or theclamp connected to the red jump lead.
WARNING
• The battery can generate oxyhydrogengas, which is highly explosive. A sparkcan be formed if a jump lead is con-nected incorrectly, and this can beenough for the battery to explode.
• The battery contains sulphuric acid,which can cause serious burns.
• If sulphuric acid comes into contactwith eyes, skin or clothing, flush withlarge quantities of water. If acidsplashes into the eyes - seek medicalattention immediately.
For more information on the car's battery - seepage 230.
06 Starting and driving
Driving with a trailer
06
181
General
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. Thetotal of the weight of the passengers and allaccessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car'spayload by a corresponding weight. For moredetailed information on weights, seepage 287.
If the towing bracket is fitted by an authorisedVolvo workshop, then the car is delivered withthe necessary equipment for driving with atrailer.
• The car's towing bracket must be of anapproved type.
• If the towbar is retrofitted, check with aVolvo dealer that the car is fully equippedfor driving with a trailer.
• Distribute the load on the trailer so that theweight on the towing bracket follows thespecified maximum towball load.
• Increase the tyre pressure to the recom-mended pressure for a full load. For tyrepressure decal location, see page 198.
• Clean the towing bracket regularly andgrease the towball1.
• The engine is loaded more heavily thanusual when driving with a trailer.
• Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car isbrand new. Please wait until it has beendriven at least 1000 km.
• The brakes are loaded much more thanusual on long and steep downhill slopes.Downshift to a lower gear and adjust yourspeed.
• Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines ofmore than 12%.
• For safety reasons, the maximum permit-ted speed for the car when coupled with atrailer should not be exceeded. Follow theregulations in force for the permittedspeeds and weights.
• Maintain a low speed when driving with atrailer up long, steep ascents.
Trailer weights
For information on Volvo's permitted trailerweights, see page 287.
NOTE
The stated maximum permitted trailerweights are those permitted by Volvo.National vehicle regulations can further limittrailer weights and speeds. Towbars can becertified for higher towing weights than thecar can actually tow.
WARNING
Follow the stated recommendations fortrailer weights. Otherwise, the car and trailermay be difficult to control in the event ofsudden movement and braking.
Manual gearbox
Overheating
When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hotclimate there may be a risk of overheating.
• Do not run the engine at higher revolutionsthan 4500 rpm (diesel engines: 3500 rpm)- otherwise the oil temperature maybecome too high.
Diesel engine 5-cyl
• If an engine starts to run too hot, the instru-ment panel will display a text messagewhich recommends switching to a lowergear - follow the recommendation given.
• In the event of a risk of overheating theoptimal speed for the engine is 2300-3000rpm for optimum circulation of the coolant.
1 Do not lubricate the towball if using a stabiliser hitch.
06 Starting and driving
Driving with a trailer
06
182
Automatic gearbox
Overheating
When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hotclimate there may be a risk of overheating.
• An automatic gearbox selects the optimumgear related to load and engine speed.
Steep inclines
• Do not lock the automatic transmission ina higher gear than the engine "can copewith" - it is not always a good idea to driveat a high gear with low engine revolutions.
IMPORTANT
See also the specific information on slowdriving with trailer for cars with thePowershift automatic transmission on page161.
Parking on a hill
1. Depress the foot brake.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Move the gear selector to parking positionP.
4. Release the foot brake.
• Move the gear selector to park position Pwhen parking an automatic car with a
hitched trailer. Always use the parkingbrake.
• Block the wheels with chocks when park-ing a car with hitched trailer on a hill.
Starting on a hill
1. Depress the foot brake.
2. Move the gear selector to driving posi-tion D.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Release the foot brake and start driving off.
06 Starting and driving
Towing equipment*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 183
Towbar
If the car is equipped with a detachable towbar,the installation instructions for the loose sec-tion must be followed carefully, seepage 185.
WARNING
If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachabletowbar:
• Follow the installation instructions care-fully.
• The detachable section must be lockedwith the key before setting off.
• Check that the indicator window showsgreen.
Important checks
• The towbar's towball must be cleaned andgreased regularly.
NOTE
If a towball hitch with vibration damper isused, it is not necessary to grease the tow-ball.
Storing the towbar
G031115
Towbar storage space.
IMPORTANT
Always remove the towbar after use andstore it in the appointed location in the car,firmly fastened with its strap.
Trailer cable
G014589
An adapter is required if the car's towingbracket has 13 pin electrics and the trailer has7 pin electrics. Use an adapter cable approvedby Volvo. Make sure the cable does not dragon the ground.
06 Starting and driving
Towing equipment*
06
184 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Specifications
G009519 G009518
G009522
Dimensions for mounting points (mm)
A B C D E F G
854 98 100 140 130 113 150
06 Starting and driving
Detachable towbar*
06
��
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 185
Fitting the towbar
G017317
1. Remove the protective cover by first press-ing in the catch and then pulling thecover straight back .
G020301
2. Ensure that the mechanism is in theunlocked position by turning the key clock-wise.
G020302
3. Check that the indicator window (3) showsred. If the window does not show red,press in and turn the locking wheel anti-clockwise until you hear a click.
06 Starting and driving
Detachable towbar*
06
186 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
G020304
4. Insert the towbar until you hear a click.
G020306
5. Check that the indicator window showsgreen.
G020307
6. Turn the key anticlockwise to locked posi-tion. Remove the key from the lock.
G020309
7. Check that the towbar is secure by pullingit up, down and back.
WARNING
If the towbar is not fitted correctly then itmust be detached and reattached inaccordance with the previous instructions.
IMPORTANT
Only grease in the ball for the towing hitch,the remainder of the towbar should be cleanand dry.
06 Starting and driving
Detachable towbar*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 187
G020310
8. Safety cable.
WARNING
Be sure to attach the trailer's safety cable tothe correct place.
Removing the towbar
G020301
1. Insert the key and turn it clockwise to theunlocked position.
G020312
2. Push in the locking wheel and turn itanticlockwise until you hear a click.
06 Starting and driving
Detachable towbar*
06
188 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
G020314
3. Turn the locking wheel down fully, until itcomes to a stop. Hold it in this positionwhile pulling the towbar rearward andupward.
WARNING
Secure the towbar safely if it is stored in thecar, see page 183.
G017318
4. Push on the protective cover.
06 Starting and driving
Loading
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 189
General
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. Thetotal of the weight of the passengers and allaccessories reduces the car's payload by acorresponding weight. For more detailed infor-mation on weights, see page 287.
WARNING
The car's driving characteristics changedepending on how heavily it is loaded andhow the load is distributed.
Loading the cargo area
Stop the engine and apply the parking brakewhen loading or unloading long objects. Thegear lever or gear selector can be knocked outof position by long loads, which could set thecar in motion.
To increase the size of the cargo area, the headrestraints can be removed and the seats foldeddown, see page 118.
Place the load firmly against the backrest infront.
• The head rests can be removed so thatthey are not damaged.
• Put wide loads in the centre.
• Heavy objects should be placed as low aspossible. Avoid placing heavy loads on alowered backrest.
• Cover sharp edges with something soft toavoid damaging the upholstery or the glasssurface of the tailgate.
• Secure all loads to the load retaining eye-lets with straps or web lashings.
WARNING
A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in afrontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, carrythe impact of an item weighing 1000 kg.
WARNING
Never load cargo above the backrest.
The protection provided by the inflatablecurtain in the headlining may be compro-mised or eliminated by high loads.
Always secure the load. During heavy brak-ing the load may otherwise shift, causinginjury to the car's occupants.
Load carriers*
To avoid damaging the car and for maximumpossible safety while driving, it is recom-mended to use load carriers specially designedfor your car by Volvo.
Carefully follow the mounting instructions sup-plied with the carriers.
• Check periodically that the load carriersand load are properly secured. Lash theload securely with retaining straps.
• Distribute the load evenly over the loadcarriers. Put the heaviest objects at thebottom.
• The size of the area exposed to the wind,and therefore fuel consumption, increasewith the load's size.
• Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration,heavy braking and hard cornering.
WARNING
The car's centre of gravity and driving cha-racteristics are altered by roof loads.
06 Starting and driving
Adjusting headlamp pattern
06
190
Correct light pattern for left or right-hand traffic
G020317
Headlamp pattern for left-hand traffic.
Headlamp pattern for right-hand traffic.
The headlamp pattern can be adjusted using acontrol in each headlamp housing to avoiddazzling oncoming motorists.
The correct pattern will also better illuminatethe verge.
Halogen headlamps
G021421
Left-hand traffic.
Right-hand traffic.
Headlamps with Active Bending Lights
G021422
Left-hand traffic.
Right-hand traffic.
WARNING
On cars with Xenon headlamps, thereplacement of Xenon lamps must be car-ried out at a workshop - an authorised Volvoworkshop is recommended. Working withXenon lamps demands extreme cautionbecause the headlamp is equipped with ahigh voltage unit.
06 Starting and driving
06
191
192 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General.................................................................................................. 194Tyre pressure........................................................................................ 198Warning triangle* and spare wheel * .................................................... 199Changing wheels................................................................................... 201Emergency puncture repair*................................................................. 203
WHEELS AND TYRES
07 Wheels and tyres
General
07
194
Driving characteristics and tyres
The tyres greatly affect the car's driving cha-racteristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyrepressure and speed rating are important forhow the car performs.
When changing tyres, ensure that tyres of thesame type and dimensions, and preferably alsothe same make, are fitted to all four wheels.Follow the recommended tyre pressuresspecified on the tyre pressure label, seepage 198.
Designation of dimensions
The dimensions are stated on all car tyres.Example: 205/55R16 91 W.
205 Tyre width (mm)
55 Ratio between tyre wall height andtyre width (%)
R Radial ply
16 Rim diameter in inches (")
91 Tyre load index (in this case 615 kg)
W Speed rating for maximum permittedspeed (in this case 270 km/h).
Speed ratings
The car is approved as a whole, which meansthat dimensions and speed ratings must notdiffer from those specified on the vehicle reg-istration document. The only exception tothese conditions is winter tyres (both thosewith metal studs and those without). If such atyre is chosen, the car must not be driven fasterthan the speed rating of the tyre (for example,class Q can be driven at a maximum of160 km/h).
Remember that traffic regulations determinehow fast a car can be driven, not the speedclass of the tyres.
Note! Maximum permitted speeds indicated.
Q 160 km/h (used only on winter tyres)
T 190 km/h
H 210 km/h
V 240 km/h
W 270 km/h
Y 300 km/h
New tyres
Tyres are perishable. After a few years theybegin to harden at the same time as the frictioncapacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate.For this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres aspossible when you replace them. This is espe-cially important with regard to winter tyres. Thelast four digits in the sequence mean the weekand year of manufacture. This is the tyre'sDOT marking (Department of Transportation),and this is stated with four digits, for example1510. The tyre in the illustration was manufac-tured in week 15 of 2010.
Tyre age
All tyres older than six years should be checkedby an expert even if they seem undamaged.
07 Wheels and tyres
General
07
195
The reason for this is that tyres age and decom-pose, even if they are hardly ever or never used.The function can therefore be affected due tothe tyre's constituent materials being brokendown. In such a case the tyre should then notbe used. This also applies to spare tyres, wintertyres and tyres saved for future use. Examplesof external signs which indicate that the tyre isunsuitable for use are cracks or discoloration.
The age of the tyre can be determined by theDOT marking, see previous illustration.
More even wear and maintenance
The correct tyre pressure results in more evenwear, see page 198. Driving style, tyre pres-sure, climate and road condition affect howquickly your tyres age and wear. To avoid dif-ferences in tread depth and to prevent wearpatterns arising, the front and rear wheels canbe switched with each other. A suitable dis-tance for the first change is approx. 5000 kmand then at 10 000 km intervals. Volvo recom-mends that you contact an authorised Volvoworkshop for checking if you are uncertainabout tread depth. If significant differences inwear (>1 mm difference in tread depth)between tyres have already occurred, the leastworn tyres must always be placed on the rear.Understeer is normally easier to correct thanoversteer, and leads to the car continuing for-
wards in a straight line rather than having therear end skidding to one side, resulting in pos-sible complete loss of control over the car. Thisis why it is important for the rear wheels neverto lose grip before the front wheels.
Wheels should be stored lying down or hangingup, and not standing up.
Tyres with tread wear indicators
G020323
Tread wear indicators.
Tread wear indicators are narrow treadlessbands across the width of the tread. On theside of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread WearIndicator). When the tyre's tread depth is downto 1.6 mm, the tread depth will be level in heightwith the tread wear indicators. Change to newtyres as soon as possible. Remember that
tyres with little tread depth provide very poorgrip in rain and snow.
Winter tyres
Volvo recommends winter tyres with specificwinter tyre dimensions. Tyre dimensions aredependent on engine variant. When driving onwinter tyres, they must be fitted to all fourwheels.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that you consult a Volvodealer about which wheel rim and tyre typesare most suitable.
Studded tyres
Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for500-1000 km, so that the studs settle properlyinto the tyres. This gives the tyre, and espe-cially the studs, a longer service life.
NOTE
The legal provisions for the use of studdedtyres vary from country to country.
Tread depth
Road conditions with ice, slush and low tem-peratures place considerably higher demandson tyres than summer conditions. It is therefore
07 Wheels and tyres
General
07
196
recommended not to drive on winter tyres thathave a tread depth of less than 4 mm.
Snow chains
Snow chains may only be used on the frontwheels. This also applies to all-wheel-drivecars.
Never drive faster than 50 km/h with snowchains. Avoid driving on bare ground as thiswears out both the snow chains and tyres.
WARNING
Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equiva-lent chains designed for the car model, andtyre and rim dimensions. In the event ofuncertainty Volvo recommends that youconsult an authorised Volvo workshop. Thewrong snow chains may cause seriousdamage to your car and lead to an accident.
Rims and wheel nuts
Only use wheel rims that are tested andapproved by Volvo and which are included inthe Volvo genuine accessories range.
Standard wheel nuts.
Bulge acorn wheel nuts.
There are two types of wheel nut, dependingon whether the wheel rims are made of steel oraluminium.
1. Tighten the wheel nuts of model (1) to 110Nm. Tighten the wheel nuts of model (2) to130 Nm.
2. Check the torque with a torque wrench.
IMPORTANT
The wheel nuts (1) should be tightened to110 Nm and (2) to 130 Nm respectively.Overtightening can damage the nuts andthe bolts.
Steel rims – standard wheel nuts (1)
Steel rims are normally mounted with thestandard wheel nuts, but the bulge acorn vari-ety may also be used.
WARNING
Never use standard nuts for aluminium rims.The wheel could come loose.
Aluminium rims – bulge acorn wheel nuts
(2)
Only use the bulge acorn variety of nuts withaluminium rims.
NOTE
These nuts may also be used with steel rims.
Locking wheel nuts
Locking wheel nuts can be used on both alu-minium and steel rims. If steel rims with lockingwheel nuts are used in combination with wheelcovers, the locking wheel nut should be moun-
07 Wheels and tyres
General
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 197
ted on the bolt nearest the air valve. Otherwisethe wheel cover cannot be fitted to the rim.
NOTE
Tighten the lockable wheel nuts to 110 Nm.
Spare wheel Temporary Spare*
The spare wheel (Temporary spare) is onlyintended for use temporarily and must bereplaced by an ordinary wheel as soon as pos-sible. The car's handling may be altered by theuse of the spare wheel. The spare wheel issmaller than the normal wheel. The car'sground clearance is affected accordingly. Payattention to high kerbs and do not machinewash the car. If the spare wheel is fitted on thefront axle, you cannot use snow chains at thesame time. On all-wheel drive cars the drive onthe rear axle can be disconnected. The sparewheel must not be repaired. The correct tyrepressure for the spare wheel is stated in thetyre pressure table, see page 298.
IMPORTANT
Never drive faster than 80 km/h with a sparewheel on the car.
IMPORTANT
The car must never be driven fitted withmore than one "Temporary Spare" wheel.
Summer and winter wheels
G020325
The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.
When summer and winter wheels are changed,see page 201, the wheels should be markedwith which side of the car they were mountedon, for example L for left and R for right. Tyreswith a tread pattern which are designed to onlyturn in one direction have the direction of rota-tion marked with an arrow.
The tyre must always rotate in the same direc-tion throughout its lifespan. Tyres should only
be switched between front and rear positions,never between left and right-hand sides, orvice versa.
If the tyre is mounted incorrectly, the car'sbraking characteristics and capacity to forcerain, snow and slush out of the way areadversely affected.
Tyres with the greatest tread depth shouldalways be fitted to the rear of the car (todecrease the risk of skidding).
Volvo recommends that you contact an author-ised Volvo workshop for checking if you areuncertain about tread depth.
07 Wheels and tyres
Tyre pressure
07
198 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Recommended tyre pressure
G007505
The tyre pressure label on the driver's side doorpillar shows which pressures the tyres shouldhave at different load and speed conditions.
• Tyre pressure for the car's recommendedtyre size
• ECO pressure1
• Spare tyre pressure (Temporary Spare).
Checking the tyre pressure
Check the tyre pressure regularly.
NOTE
Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is anatural phenomenon. Tyre pressure alsovaries depending on ambient temperature.
Even after several kilometres of driving, thetyres warm up and the pressure increases. Soair must not be released if the pressure ischecked when the tyres are warm. While thepressure must be increased if it is too low.
Inadequately inflated tyres increase fuel con-sumption, shorten tyre lifespan and impair thecar's roadholding. Driving on tyres with tyrepressure that is too low can also result in thetyres overheating and disintegrating.
For information on the correct tyre pressure,refer to the tyre pressure table. The specifiedtyre pressures refer to "cold tyres". ("Coldtyres" means the tyres are the same tempera-ture as the ambient temperature.)
Fuel economy, ECO pressure
At speeds under 160 km/h the general tyrepressure for maximum load is recommendedin order to obtain optimum fuel economy.
Tyre pressure affects travelling comfort, roadnoise and steering characteristics.
DRIVe*
An important detail in connection with environ-mentally-conscious driving is to use the righttype of tyres and to drive with the correct airpressure inside them.
Dimensions
When fitting new tyres, the same type andbrand as the car was equipped with from thefactory are recommended - they are designedfor low fuel consumption.
The 195/65 R15 and 205/55 R16 dimensionsgenerally provide a slightly lower consumptionthan wider variants.
Pressure
Inadequately inflated tyres increase fuel con-sumption. For this reason, check the pressurein the tyres regularly.
By using so-called ECO pressure2 fuel con-sumption is minimised. A certain impact on ridecomfort, road noise and steering characteris-tics may be experienced, but this does notaffect safety.
See the decal with the recommended tyrepressure adjacent to the driver's door pillar.
1 ECO pressure results in improved fuel economy.2 The pressure that is recommended for maximum load.
07 Wheels and tyres
Warning triangle* and spare wheel *
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 199
Warning triangle
Follow the regulations for the use of a warningtriangle*. Place the warning triangle in a suita-ble place with regard to the traffic.
1. Undo the case containing the warning tri-angle, it is secured with Velcro straps. Takethe warning triangle from the case.
2. Lower the warning triangle's support legs.
Ensure the warning triangle and its case arefirmly secured in the cargo area after use.
Spare wheel* and jack *
The car's original jack*
The original jack* must only be used for chang-ing wheels. The jack's thread should always bewell greased. The spare wheel* plus jack* andwheel wrench* are stored under the floor in thecargo area.
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack* thatbelongs to the car model in question, whichis indicated on the jack's label.
The label also indicates the jack's maximumlift capacity at a specified minimum liftingheight.
Taking out the spare wheel
A bolt runs through to secure the spare wheel.
1. Fold up the cargo area floor.
2. Unscrew the retaining bolt and lift out thewheel.
07 Wheels and tyres
Warning triangle* and spare wheel *
07
200 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Putting the spare wheel* and jack* into
the cargo area
Wheel wrench*.
Jack* and handle, secured with a tension-ing strap.
The spare wheel is bolted down with therim side down using the through-bolt.
Tools - returning into place
Tools and jack* must be returned into place inthe correct manner after use.
• For cars equipped with spare wheel, thejack must be cranked so that it fits into thespare wheel.
• For cars equipped with emergency punc-ture repair kit, the jack must be fullycranked together and returned into thefoam block.
IMPORTANT
The tools and jack* must be stored in theintended location in the car's cargo areawhen not in use.
First aid*
A case with first aid equipment is located in thecargo area.
07 Wheels and tyres
Changing wheels
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 201
Removing wheels
G020331
Set up the warning triangle if a wheel must bechanged at a busy location. Make sure that thecar and jack are on a firm horizontal surface.
WARNING
Check that the jack is not damaged, that thethreads are thoroughly lubricated and that itis free from dirt.
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack* thatbelongs to the car model in question, whichis indicated on the jack's label.
The label also indicates the jack's maximumlift capacity at a specified minimum liftingheight.
1. Take out the spare wheel*, jack* and wheelwrench* that are located under the carpetin the cargo area. If another jack isselected, see page 219.
2. Apply the parking brake and engagereverse gear, or position P if the car has anautomatic gearbox.
3. Place chocks in front of and behind thewheels which will remain on the ground.Use heavy wooden blocks or large stones.
4. Cars with steel rims have removable wheelcovers. Prize off the wheel cover with theend of the wheel wrench, or pull it off byhand.
5. Loosen the wheel nuts ½-1 turn anticlock-wise with the wheel wrench.
G020332
Telescopic wheel wrench.
WARNING
Never position anything between theground and the jack, nor between the jackand the car's jacking point.
6. There are two jacking points on each sideof the car. There is a recess in the plasticcover at each point. Crank the foot of thejack down so it is pressed squarely on theground. Check that the jack is seated cor-rectly in the intended jacking point, as illus-trated, and that the base is located directlyunder it.
07 Wheels and tyres
Changing wheels
07
202
IMPORTANT
The ground must be firm, smooth and level.
7. Lift the car so that the wheel is free.Remove the wheel nuts and lift off thewheel.
Fitting the wheel
1. Clean the contact surfaces between wheeland hub.
2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel nuts.
3. Lower the car so that the wheel cannotrotate.
4. Tighten the wheel nuts crosswise. It isimportant that the wheel nuts are tightenedproperly.
• Standard wheel nuts - tightening tor-que: 110 Nm
• Domed wheel nuts - tightening torque:130 Nm
Check the torque with a torque wrench.
5. Put on the wheel cover (steel rim).
WARNING
Never crawl under the car when it is raisedon the jack.
Passengers must leave the car when it israised on the jack.
Ensure that passengers wait with the car -or preferably a crash barrier - between themand the road.
07 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair*
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 203
Emergency puncture repair, generalinformation
The emergency puncture repair kit is used toseal a puncture as well as to check and adjustthe tyre pressure. It consists of a compressorand a bottle with sealing fluid. The kit works asa temporary repair. The sealing fluid bottlemust be replaced before its expiration date andafter use.
The sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punc-tured in the tread.
NOTE
The emergency puncture repair kit is onlyintended for sealing tyres with a puncture inthe tread.
The emergency puncture repair kit has limitedcapacity to seal tyres which have punctures inthe wall. Do not seal tyres with the emergencypuncture repair kit if they have larger slits,cracks or similar damage.
12 V sockets for the compressor are located bythe centre console in the front and by the rearseat. Choose the electrical socket that is near-est the punctured tyre.
WARNING
You should not drive faster than 80 km/hafter the emergency tyre repair kit has beenused. Volvo recommends that you visit anauthorised Volvo workshop for inspection ofthe sealed tyre (maximum driving distanceis 200 km). The staff there can determinewhether or not the tyre can be repaired or ifit needs to be replaced.
Taking out the emergency puncture
repair kit
The emergency puncture repair kit with com-pressor and tools are stored under the floor inthe cargo area.
1. Fold up the cargo area floor.
2. Unscrew the bolt and remove the holder.
3. Lift up the emergency puncture repair kit.
Fitting the emergency puncture repair kit
1. Insert the emergency puncture repair kit.2. Align the holder in the inner and lower
grooves of the spare wheel well3. Screw in the bolt.
NOTE
Incorrect installation of the holder maycause the emergency puncture repair kit torattle.
07 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair*
07
204 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Overview
G020400
Decal, maximum permitted speed
Switch
Cable
Bottle holder (orange cap)
Protective cap
Pressure reducing valve
Air hose
Sealing fluid bottle
Pressure gauge
Sealing punctured tyres
G019723
For information on the function of the parts, seepreceding illustration.
1. Open the lid of the emergency puncturerepair kit.
2. Detach the decal for maximum permittedspeed and affix it to the steering wheel.
WARNING
The sealing fluid can irritate the skin. In thecase of contact with skin, wash away thefluid with soap and water.
3. Check that the switch is in position 0 andlocate the cable and the air hose.
NOTE
Do not break the bottle's seal before use.The seal is broken automatically when thebottle is screwed in.
4. Unscrew the orange cap and unscrew thebottle's stopper.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equippedwith a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
5. Screw the bottle into its holder.
6. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screwin the air hose valve connection to the bot-tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car withoutsupervision when the engine is running.
7. Plug the cable into the 12 V socket andstart the car.
07 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair*
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 205
WARNING
Never stand next to the tyre when the com-pressor is running. If cracks or unevennessarise then the compressor must beswitched off immediately. The journeyshould not be continued. Contacting anauthorised tyre centre is recommended.
NOTE
When the compressor starts, the pressurecan increase up to 6 bar but the pressuredrops after approximately 30 seconds.
8. Flick the switch to position I.
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor mustnot run for more than 10 minutes.
9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.
WARNING
If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the holein the tyre is too big. The journey should notbe continued. Contacting an authorised tyrecentre is recommended.
10. Switch off the compressor to check thepressure on the pressure gauge. Minimum
pressure is 1.8 bar and maximum is3.5 bar.
11. Switch off the compressor and unplug thecable from the 12 V socket.
12. Detach the hose from the tyre valve and fitthe valve cap.
13. As soon as possible, drive approximately 3km at a maximum speed of 80 km/h so thatthe sealing fluid can seal the tyre.
Rechecking the repair and pressure
1. Reconnect the equipment.
2. Read the tyre pressure on the pressuregauge.
3. If it is below 1.3 bar then the tyre is insuf-ficiently sealed. The journey should not becontinued. Contact a tyre centre.
4. If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 bar,the tyre must be inflated to the pressurespecified on the tyre pressure decal.Release air using the pressure reducingvalve if the tyre pressure is too high.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equippedwith a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
5. Switch off the compressor. Detach the airhose and cable. Refit the dust cap.
NOTE
The sealing fluid bottle and the hose mustbe replaced after use. Volvo recommendsthat this replacement is performed by anauthorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure regularly.
6. Return the emergency puncture repair kitto the cargo area.
7. Volvo recommends that you drive to thenearest authorised Volvo workshop for thereplacement/repair of the damaged tyre.Advise the workshop that the tyre containssealing fluid.
WARNING
You should not drive faster than 80 km/hafter the emergency tyre repair kit has beenused. Volvo recommends that you visit anauthorised Volvo workshop for inspection ofthe sealed tyre (maximum driving distanceis 200 km). The staff there can determinewhether or not the tyre can be repaired or ifit needs to be replaced.
07 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair*
07
206 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Inflating the tyres
The car's original tyres can be inflated by thecompressor.
1. The compressor must be switched off.Make sure that the switch is in position 0and locate the cable and air hose.
2. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screwin the air hose valve connection to the bot-tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
WARNING
Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result indanger to life. Never leave the engine run-ning in sealed areas or areas that lack suf-ficient ventilation.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car withoutsupervision when the engine is running.
3. Connect the cable to one of the car's12 V sockets and start the car.
4. Start the compressor by flicking the switchto position I.
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor mustnot run for more than 10 minutes.
5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified onthe tyre pressure decal. (Release air usingthe pressure reducing valve if the tyre pres-sure is too high.)
6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the airhose and cable.
7. Refit the dust cap.
Changing the sealing fluid canister
Replace the bottle before the expiration datehas passed. Treat the old bottle as environ-mentally hazardous waste.
WARNING
The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and naturalrubber-latex.
Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergicreaction in the event of skin contact.
Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.
Store out of the reach of children.
NOTE
Leave the container at a collection point forstoring dangerous waste.
07 Wheels and tyres
07
207
208
Cleaning................................................................................................ 210Touching up paintwork......................................................................... 214Rustproofing......................................................................................... 215
CAR CARE
08 Car care
Cleaning
08
210
Washing the car
Wash the car as soon as it becomes dirty. Usecar shampoo. Dirt and road salt can lead tocorrosion.
• Do not park the car in direct sunlight.Washing a car with hot paintwork cancause permanent paintwork damage.Wash the car in a car wash with wastewater separator.
• Hose down the underbody thoroughly.
• Wash using a sponge, car shampoo andplenty of lukewarm water.
• If the dirt is difficult to dislodge, wash thecar using a cold degreasing agent.
• Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois ora water scraper.
WARNING
Always have the engine cleaned by a work-shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine ishot.
IMPORTANT
Dirty headlamps have impaired functional-ity. Clean them regularly, when refuelling forexample.
NOTE
Outside lighting such as headlamps, foglamps and rear lamps may temporarily havecondensation on the inside of the lens. Thisis a natural phenomenon, all outside lightingis designed to withstand this. Condensationis normally vented out of the lamp when ithas been switched on for a time.
Cleaning the wiper blades
Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades,as well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen,impair the service life of wiper blades.
NOTE
Wash the wiper blades and windscreen reg-ularly with lukewarm soap solution or carshampoo.
Do not use any strong solvents.
Removing bird droppings
Wash away bird droppings from the paintworkas soon as possible. Bird droppings containchemicals that affect and discolour paintworkvery quickly. This discoloration can only beremoved by a specialist.
Chromed wheels
IMPORTANT
Rim cleaning agents can cause stains onchrome-plated wheels. Wash using asponge, car shampoo and plenty of luke-warm water.
Automatic car washes
An automatic car wash is a simple and quickway of washing the car, but it can never replacea proper handwashing. The brushes of an auto-matic car wash cannot reach everywhere.
IMPORTANT
Washing by hand is gentler to the paintworkthan an automatic car wash. Paintwork isalso more sensitive when it is new. For thisreason, handwashing is recommended dur-ing the first few months with a new car.
High-pressure washing
When using high-pressure washing, usesweeping movements and make sure that thenozzle does not come closer than 30 cm to thesurface of the car (the distance applies to allexterior parts).
08 Car care
Cleaning
08
211
IMPORTANT
Rinse the entire car to remove loose dirt.When using a pressure washer: Make surethat the nozzle of the pressure washer is notcloser than 30 cm to the bodywork. Do notspray directly onto the locks.
Testing the brakes
WARNING
Always test the brakes after washing thecar, including the parking brake, to ensurethat moisture and corrosion do not attackthe brake linings and reduce braking per-formance.
Lightly depress the brake pedal now and thenwhen driving long distances in rain or slush.This heats and dries the brake pads. Do thesame thing after starting in very damp or coldweather.
Exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components
A special cleaning agent available from Volvodealers is recommended for the cleaning andcare of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trimcomponents (such as glossy trim mouldings).When using such a cleaning agent the instruc-tions must be followed carefully.
IMPORTANT
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic andrubber.
When using degreasant on plastic and rub-ber, only rub with light pressure if it is nec-essary. Use a soft washing sponge.
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wearaway or damage the glossy surface.
Polishing agent that contains abrasive mustnot be used.
Polishing and waxing
Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dullor to give the paintwork extra protection.
The car does not need to be polished until it isat least one year old. However, the car can bewaxed before this time. Do not polish or waxthe car in direct sunlight.
Wash and dry the car thoroughly before youbegin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphaltand tar stains using tar remover or white spirit.More stubborn stains can be removed usingfine rubbing paste designed for car paintwork.
Polish first with a polish and then wax with liq-uid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on thepackaging carefully. Many preparations con-tain both polish and wax.
IMPORTANT
Only paint treatment recommended byVolvo should be used. Other treatment suchas preserving, sealing, protection, lustresealing or similar could damage the paint-work. Paintwork damage caused by suchtreatments is not covered by Volvo war-ranty.
Cleaning the interior
Only use cleaning agents and car care prod-ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regularlyand follow the instructions included with thecar care product.
Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaningagents.
Carpets and cargo area
Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning ofthe floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use avacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt.
Each inlay mat is secured with pins.
– Take hold of the inlay mat at each pin andlift the mat straight up.
Fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in ateach pin.
08 Car care
Cleaning
08
212
WARNING
Before setting off check that the inlaid matin the driver area is firmly affixed andsecured in the pins in order to avoid gettingcaught adjacent to and under the pedals.
A special textile cleaner is recommended forstains on the floor mat after vacuuming. Floormats should be cleaned with agents recom-mended by your Volvo dealer!
Treatment of stains on textile upholstery
and headliner
A special fabric cleaning agent, available fromauthorised Volvo dealers, is recommended toavoid impairing the fire retardant qualities ofthe upholstery.
IMPORTANT
Sharp objects and Velcro may damage thefabric upholstery.
Treating stains on leather upholstery
Volvo's leather upholstery is chromium-freeand is treated to preserve its original appear-ance.
Leather upholstery ages and acquires a beau-tiful patina over time. The leather is refined andprocessed so that it retains its natural charac-teristics. It is given a protective coating, but
regular cleaning is required in order to maintainboth characteristics and appearance. Volvooffers a comprehensive product for the clean-ing and treatment of leather upholstery which,when used in accordance with the instructions,preserves the leather's protective coating.After a period of use the natural appearance ofthe leather will nevertheless emerge, depend-ing more or less on the surface texture of theleather. This is a natural maturing of the leatherand shows that it is a natural product.
To achieve best results Volvo recommendscleaning and the application of protectivecream once to four times per year (or more ifnecessary). The Volvo Leather Care kit is avail-able from your Volvo dealer.
IMPORTANT
• Certain items of coloured clothing (forexample, jeans and suede garments)may stain the upholstery.
• Never use strong solvents. Such prod-ucts may damage fabric, vinyl andleather upholstery.
Washing instructions for leather
upholstery
1. Pour the leather cleaner on the dampenedsponge and squeeze out a strong foam.
2. Work the dirt away with gentle circularmovements.
3. Dab accurately with the sponge on thestains. Allow the sponge to absorb thestain. Do not rub.
4. Wipe off with soft paper or a cloth andallow the leather to dry completely.
Protective treatment of leather
upholstery
Vacuuming is important prior to using leathercare agents.
1. Pour a small amount of the protectivecream on the felted cloth and massage ina thin layer of cream with gentle circularmovements on the leather.
2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutesbefore use.
The leather has now been given improved pro-tection against stains and improved UV pro-tection.
IMPORTANT
Sharp objects may damage the leather, (e.g.rings).
08 Car care
Cleaning
08
213
Washing instructions for the leather
steering wheel
• Remove dirt and dust with a soft pre-mois-tened sponge and neutral soap.
• Leather needs to breathe. Never cover theleather steering wheel with protective plas-tic.
• Use natural oils. Volvo's leather careagents are recommended for best results.
If the steering wheel has stains:
Group 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat andblood)
– Use a soft cloth or sponge. Mix a 5%ammonia solution. (For blood stains, use asolution of 2 dl water and 25g salt.)
Group 2 (fats, oils, sauces and chocolate)
1. Same procedure as group I.
2. Polish with an absorbent paper or cloth.
Group 3 (dry dirt, dust)
1. Use a soft brush to remove the dirt.
2. Same procedure as group I.
Treating stains on interior plastic, metal
and wood parts
A special cleaning agent, available from Volvodealers, is recommended for cleaning interiorparts and surfaces. Do not scrape or rub stains.Never use strong stain removers.
Cleaning seatbelts
Use water and a synthetic detergent. A specialtextile cleaning agent is available from yourVolvo dealer. Make sure the seatbelt is drybefore allowing it to retract.
08 Car care
Touching up paintwork
08
214
Paintwork
Paint is an important part of the car's rust-proofing and should therefore be checked reg-ularly. To avoid the onset of rust, damagedpaintwork should be rectified immediately. Themost common types of paintwork damage arestone chips, scratches, and marks on theedges of wings and doors.
Colour code
Data plate.
Code for car colour
It is important that the correct colour is used.For product decal location, see page 284.
Stone chips and scratches
G020345
Before touching up paintwork, the car must beclean and dry and at a temperature above15 °C.
Materials
• Primer in a can
• Spray can or touch-up pen1
• Masking tape.
Minor stone chips and scratches
If the stone chip has not penetrated to the baremetal and there is an undamaged colour coat,you can paint straight after cleaning the dam-aged area.
If the stone chip has penetrated to the
bare metal
1. Apply a piece of masking tape over thedamaged surface. Then remove the tape toremove any loose paint.
2. Stir the primer well and apply using a finebrush or a matchstick. Apply paint using abrush once the primer is dry.
3. For scratches, proceed as above, butmask around the damaged area to protectthe undamaged paintwork.
4. After a few days, polish the touched-upareas. Use a soft rag and a small amountof lapping paste.
1 Follow the instructions contained in the touch-up pen's packaging.
08 Car care
Rustproofing
08
215
Inspection and maintenance
Your car has already received a thorough andcomplete rustproofing at the factory. Parts ofthe body are made of galvanised sheet metal.The underbody is protected by a wear-resis-tant anti-corrosion compound. A thin, pene-trating rustproofing fluid was sprayed into themembers, cavities and closed sections.
Maintain the car's rustproofing.
• Keep the car clean. Hose down the under-body. If using a pressure washer, keep thenozzle at least 30 cm from the painted sur-faces.
• Regularly check and touch-up the rust-proofing treatment as necessary.
The car's rustproofing does not normallyrequire treatment for approximately 12 years.After this period, it should be treated at three-year intervals. If the car needs further treat-ment, Volvo recommends that you engage anauthorised Volvo workshop for assistance.
216
Volvo service......................................................................................... 218Self-maintenance.................................................................................. 219Bonnet and engine compartment......................................................... 220Oils and fluids....................................................................................... 222Wiper blades......................................................................................... 228Battery................................................................................................... 230Replacing bulbs.................................................................................... 234Fuses..................................................................................................... 240
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
09 Maintenance and service
Volvo service 09
218
Volvo service programme
Before the car left the factory, it was thoroughlytest driven. It was checked again in accord-ance with Volvo Car Corporation regulationsbefore it was handed over to you.
To keep your Volvo as safe and reliable as pos-sible, follow the Volvo service programmespecified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.Volvo also recommends that you engage anauthorised Volvo workshop to perform theservice and maintenance work. Volvo work-shops have the personnel, special tools andservice literature to guarantee the highest qual-ity of service.
IMPORTANT
For the Volvo warranty to apply, check andfollow the instructions in the Service andWarranty Booklet.
Special service measures
Certain service measures which affect the car'selectrical system can only be performed usingelectronic equipment specially developed foryour car. For this reason, Volvo recommendsthat you always contact an authorised Volvoworkshop before beginning or performingservice work that affects the electrical system.
09 Maintenance and service
Self-maintenance 09
219
Before starting work on the car
Battery
Check that the battery cables are correctlyconnected and tightened.
Never disconnect the battery when the engineis running (e.g. if replacing the battery).
Never use a quick charger to charge the bat-tery. The battery cables must be disconnectedwhen charging the battery.
The battery contains acid that is both corrosiveand toxic. It is therefore important to handle thebattery in an environmentally correct manner.Let your Volvo dealer assist you.
WARNING
The ignition system has very high voltageand output. The voltage in the ignition sys-tem is highly dangerous. The ignition musttherefore always be switched off for work inthe engine compartment.
Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coilswhen the ignition is on or the engine is hot.
Raising the car
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack thatbelongs to the car model in question. If ajack is selected other than the one recom-mended by Volvo, follow the instructions foruse supplied with the equipment.
If the car is raised with a workshop jack; posi-tion the jack against the front edge on the sub-frame.
Do not damage the splashguard under theengine. Ensure that the jack is positioned sothat the car cannot slide off the jack. Alwaysuse axle stands or similar.
If you raise the car using a two-pillar workshoplift, ensure that the front and rear lift arms arefixed under the lifting points. See precedingillustration.
Check regularly
Check the following at regular intervals, forexample, when refuelling:
• Coolant – The level must be between theMIN and MAX marks on the expansiontank.
• Engine oil – The level must be between theMIN and MAX marks.
• Power steering fluid – The level must bebetween the MIN and MAX marks.
• Washer fluid – The reservoir should be wellfilled. Fill washer fluid with antifreeze attemperatures around freezing point.
• Brake and clutch fluid – The level must bebetween the MIN and MAX marks.
WARNING
Remember that the radiator fan (located atthe front of the engine compartment, behindthe radiator) may start automatically someafter the engine has been switched off.
Always have the engine cleaned by a work-shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine ishot.
09 Maintenance and service
Bonnet and engine compartment 09
220
Opening the bonnet
The illustration shows a left-hand drive car.
1. Pull the handle on the far left under theinstrument panel. (In right-hand drive carsthe handle is on the far right.) You will hearwhen the catch releases.
2. Insert your hand under the centre of thefront edge of the bonnet and press thesafety catch to the right.
3. Open the bonnet.
WARNING
Check that the bonnet locks properly whenclosed.
Engine compartment
Washer fluid reservoir (4-cyl.)
Coolant expansion tank
Reservoir for the power steering fluid (con-cealed behind the headlamp)
Dipstick1 for engine oil2
Radiator
Radiator fan
Washer fluid reservoir (5-cyl.)
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-handdrive)
Filling the engine oil2
1 Engines with electronic oil level sensor have no dipstick (5-cyl. diesel).2 The location varies depending on engine alternative.
09 Maintenance and service
Bonnet and engine compartment 09
221
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-handdrive)
Battery
Relay and fuse box
Air filter2
2 The location varies depending on engine alternative.
09 Maintenance and service
Oils and fluids 09
222
Checking the engine oil
Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.
IMPORTANT
Always use oil of the prescribed grade.Check the oil level frequently and changethe oil regularly. The engine will be damagedif lower grade oil is used or if the car is drivenwith the oil level too low.
When driving under adverse conditions, seepage 290.
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for theengine's service intervals all engines arefilled with a specially adapted syntheticengine oil at the factory. The choice of oilhas been made very carefully with regard toservice life, starting characteristics, fuelconsumption and environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used inorder that the recommended service inter-vals can be applied. Only use a prescribedgrade of oil for both filling and oil change,otherwise you will risk affecting service life,starting characteristics, fuel consumptionand environmental impact.
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war-ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribedgrade and viscosity is not used.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are car-ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
Volvo uses different systems for warning oflow/high oil level or low/high oil pressure. Cer-tain variants have an oil pressure sensor, andthen the lamp for oil pressure is used. Othervariants have an oil level sensor, and then thedriver is informed via the warning symbol in thecentre of the instrument unit as well as by dis-play texts. Certain models have both variants.Contact a Volvo dealer for more information.
Change the engine oil and oil filter in accord-ance with the intervals specified in the Serviceand Warranty Booklet.
Using oil of a higher than specified grade ispermitted. If the car is driven in adverse con-ditions, Volvo recommends using an oil of ahigher grade, see page 290.
For capacities, see page 291 and onwards.
Engine with oil dipstick1
Petrol engine.
Dipstick, petrol engines.
Filler pipe, engine oil.
1 Only applies to petrol and 4-cyl. diesel.
09 Maintenance and service
Oils and fluids 09
223
Diesel engine.
Dipstick, 4-cyl diesel engines.
Filler pipe, engine oil.
Checking the oil level in a new car is especiallyimportant before the first scheduled oil change.
Volvo recommends checking the oil level every2 500 km. The most accurate measurementsare made on a cold engine before starting. Themeasurement will be inaccurate if taken imme-diately after the engine is switched off. Thedipstick will indicate that the level is too lowbecause the oil has not had time to flow downinto the oil sump.
G020336
The oil level must be within the area marked on thedipstick.
Measurement and filling if required
1. Ensure that the car is level. After switchingoff the engine it is important to wait5 minutes to allow the oil time to run backto the sump.
2. Pull up and wipe the dipstick.
3. Re-insert the dipstick.
4. Pull it out and check the level.
5. If the level is close to MIN then 0.5 litresshould be added. If the level is significantly
below, then an additional amount isrequired.
6. If required, check the level again, do it afterdriving a short distance. Then repeat steps1 - 4.
WARNING
Never fill above the MAX mark. The levelshould never be above MAX or below MINas this could lead to engine damage.
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifolddue to the risk of fire.
09 Maintenance and service
Oils and fluids 09
224
For engines with electronic oil level
sensor2
Filler pipe.3
You do not need to take action with respect tothe engine oil level before a message is shownin the display, see the illustration below.
Message and graph in the display.
Message
Engine oil level
The oil level is checked using the electronic oillevel gauge with the thumbwheel when theengine is switched off, see page 63.
WARNING
If the message Oil service required isshown, visit a workshop. The oil level maybe too high.
IMPORTANT
In the event of the message Oil level low,Fill oil, only fill with 0.5 litres.
NOTE
The oil level is only detected by the systemduring driving. The system cannot directlydetect changes when the oil is filled ordrained. The car must be drivenabout 30 km before the oil level display iscorrect.
WARNING
Do not fill more oil if filling level (3) or (4)appears as shown in the illustration below.The level must never be above MAX orbelow MIN, as this could lead to enginedamage.
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifolddue to the risk of fire.
2 Only applies to 5-cyl. diesel.3 Engines with electronic oil level sensor have no dipstick (5-cyl. diesel).
09 Maintenance and service
Oils and fluids 09
225
Measuring the oil level
If the oil level needs to be checked then itshould be carried out in accordance with thesequence below.
1. Activate key position II, see page 152.
2. Rotate the thumbwheel on the left-handstalk switch to position Engine oil level
Please wait....> You will then see information displayed
about the engine oil level.
The figures 1-4 represent filling level. Do not fillmore oil if filling level (3) or (4) is shown. Recom-mended filling level is 4.
Washer fluid, topping up
The windscreen and headlamp washers sharea common reservoir.
For capacities, see the table Fluids on page293.
Filler cap on 4-cylinder engines and diesel.
Filler cap on 5-cylinder engines.
Add washer fluid with antifreeze in the winterso that the fluid does not freeze in the pump,reservoir and hoses.
NOTE
Mix concentrated washer fluid with waterbefore filling.
TIP! Clean the wiper blades when topping upwasher fluid.
Checking and topping up the coolant
When topping up the coolant, follow theinstructions on the packaging. It is importantthat the mixture of coolant concentrate andwater is correct for the prevailing weather con-ditions. Never top up with water only. The riskof freezing increases with both too little and toomuch coolant concentrate.
09 Maintenance and service
Oils and fluids 09
226
IMPORTANT
• A high content of chlorine, chloridesand other salts may cause corrosion inthe cooling system.
• Always use coolant with anti-corrosionagent as recommended by Volvo.
• Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50%water and 50% coolant.
• Mix the coolant with approved qualitytap water. In the event of any doubtabout water quality, used ready-mixedcoolant in accordance with Volvo rec-ommendations.
• When changing coolant/replacing cool-ing system components, flush the cool-ing system clean with approved qualitytap water or flush with ready-mixedcoolant.
• The engine must only be run with a well-filled cooling system. Otherwise, tem-peratures that are too high may occurresulting in the risk of damage (cracks)in the cylinder head.
For capacities and for standards regardingwater quality, see page 293.
Check the coolant regularly
The level must lie between the MIN and MAX
marks on the expansion tank. If the system isnot filled sufficiently, high local temperaturescould occur, causing a risk of damage (cracks)to the cylinder head. Top up the coolant whenthe level falls to the MIN mark.
WARNING
Coolant can be very hot. If the coolantrequires topping up when the engine is atoperating temperature, unscrew the expan-sion tank cap slowly to gently release theoverpressure.
NOTE
The engine must only be run with a well-filled cooling system. Otherwise, tempera-tures that are too high may occur resultingin the risk of damage (cracks) in the cylinderhead.
Checking and topping up the brake andclutch fluid
Brake and clutch fluid have a common reser-voir4. The fluid level must be between theMIN and MAX marks. Check the level regularly.Change the brake fluid every other year or atevery other regular service.
For capacities and recommended fluid grade,see the table Fluids on page 293.
The fluid should be changed annually on carsdriven in conditions requiring hard, frequentbraking, such as driving in mountains or tropi-cal climates with high humidity.
4 Location dependent on whether car is left or right-hand drive.
09 Maintenance and service
Oils and fluids 09
227
WARNING
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in thebrake fluid reservoir, do not drive furtherbefore topping up the brake fluid.
The reason for the loss of brake fluid mustbe investigated.
Checking and topping up the powersteering fluid
NOTE
Check the level frequently.
The fluid does not require changing. Forcapacities and recommended fluid grade, seepage 293.
If a fault should arise in the power steering sys-tem or if the car is without power and must betowed, it can still be steered. However, thesteering will be much heavier than normal andit will require more effort to turn the steeringwheel.
09 Maintenance and service
Wiper blades 09
228
Wiper blades
G020330
NOTE
The wiper blades are different lengths. Theblade on the driver's side is longer than onthe other side.
Cleaning
For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen, seepage 210.
IMPORTANT
Check the wiper blades regularly.Neglected maintenance shortens the serv-ice life of the wiper blades.
Replacing the wiper blades, windscreen 1. Lift up the wiper arm.
2. Press the button located on the wiperblade mounting and pull straight out (1),parallel with the wiper arm.
3. Slide in (2) the new wiper blade until a"click" is heard.> Check (3) that the blade is firmly instal-
led and fold down the wiper arm.
Changing the rear window wiper blade
G007444
1. Fold out the wiper arm.
2. Detach the wiper blade by pulling ittowards the rear window.
3. Press the new wiper blade into position.
09 Maintenance and service
Wiper blades 09
229
> Check that it is firmly installed and foldback the wiper arm.
09 Maintenance and service
Battery 09
230
Operation
The service life and function of the battery isinfluenced by factors such as the number ofstarts, discharging, driving style, driving con-ditions and climatic conditions.
• Never disconnect the battery when theengine is running.
• Check that the cables to the battery arecorrectly connected and properly tight-ened.
WARNING
• The battery can generate oxyhydrogengas, which is highly explosive. A sparkcan be formed if a jump lead is con-nected incorrectly, and this can beenough for the battery to explode.
• The battery contains sulphuric acid,which can cause serious burns.
• If sulphuric acid comes into contactwith eyes, skin or clothing, flush withlarge quantities of water. If acidsplashes into the eyes - seek medicalattention immediately.
NOTE
The life of the battery is shortened if itbecomes discharged repeatedly.
The life of the battery is affected by severalfactors, including driving conditions and cli-mate. Battery starting capacity decreasesgradually with time and therefore needs tobe recharged if the car is not used for alonger time or when it is only driven shortdistances. Extreme cold further limits star-ting capacity.
To maintain the battery in good condition, atleast 15 minutes of driving/week is recom-mended or that the battery is connected toa battery charger with automatic tricklecharging.
A battery that is kept fully charged has amaximum service life.
Symbols on the battery
Use protective goggles.
Further information in theowner's manual.
Store the battery out ofthe reach of children.
The battery contains cor-rosive acid.
09 Maintenance and service
Battery 09
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 231
Avoid sparks and nakedflames.
Risk of explosion.
Must be taken for recy-cling.
NOTE
An expended battery must be recycled in anenvironmentally correct manner as it con-tains lead.
Changing the battery
Removal
1. Remove the remote control key from theignition switch.
2. Wait at least 5 minutes before touching anyelectrical terminals.> The car's electrical system needs to
store the necessary information to thecontrol modules.
3. Remove the cover.
4. Detach the black negative cable.
WARNING
Connect and remove the positive and neg-ative cables in the correct order.
5. Detach the red positive cable.
6. Undo the front wall of the battery box usinga screwdriver.
7. Detach the ventilation hose from the bat-tery.
8. Release the clamp securing the battery.
9. Remove the battery.
Fitting
1. Fit the battery into position.
2. Tighten the clamp that holds the battery.
3. Connect the ventilation hose.> Check that it is correctly connected to
both battery and outlet in the body.
4. Reinstall the front wall of the battery box.
5. Connect the red positive cable.
6. Connect the black negative cable.
7. Attach the cover to the battery.
For more information on the car's battery - seepages 180 and 300.
DRIVe Start/Stop*
Cars with the Start/Stop function are equippedwith two 12 V batteries - one extra powerfulbattery for starting and one standby batterythat helps during the Start/Stop function's star-ting sequence.
For more information on Start/Stop - seepage 163.
09 Maintenance and service
Battery 09
232
Battery Start Standby
Cold startcapacityA,CCA (A)
760 120
Dimen-sionsB,L×W×H(mm)
278×175×190
150×90×106
Capacity(Ah)
70 8
A In accordance with the SAE standard.B Largest possible size.
NOTE
• The higher the current take-off in the car(extra cooling/heating, etc.) the morethe batteries must be charged =increased fuel consumption.
• When the capacity of the battery hasfallen below the lowest permissible levelthen the Start/Stop function is disen-gaged.
Temporarily reduced Start/Stop function dueto high current take-off means:
• The engine auto-starts1 without the driverdepressing the clutch pedal.
Location of the batteries
1. Battery2 2. Standby battery.
The standby battery normally requires no moreservice than the normal battery that is used forstarting. A workshop should be contacted inthe event of questions or problems - an author-ised Volvo workshop is recommended.
IMPORTANT
If the following instruction is not observedthen the Start/Stop function may temporar-ily cease to work after the connection of anexternal battery or battery charger:
• The negative battery terminal on thecar's main battery must never be usedfor connecting an external battery orbattery charger - only the car chassis
may be used as the grounding point.See the section "Start assistance" - for adescription of how the cable clamps mustbe attached.
1 Auto-start can only take place if the gear lever is in neutral position.2 The battery is described in detail on page 230.
09 Maintenance and service
Battery 09
233
NOTE
If the battery has become so dischargedthat everything is "black" and in principlethe car does not have all the normal electri-cal functions and the engine is subsequentlystarted using an external battery or batterycharger, then the Start/Stop function will beactivated. It will then be possible for theengine to be auto-stopped but in the eventof an auto-stop the Start/Stop function mayfail to auto-start the engine due to inade-quate capacity in the battery.
The battery must first be charged in order toensure a successful auto-start after an auto-stop. At an outside temperature of +15 °Cthe battery needs to be charged for at least1 hour. At a lower outside temperature acharging time of 3-4 hours is recom-mended. The recommendation is that thebattery is charged using an external batterycharger.
If this is not possible then the recommen-dation is to temporarily deactivate theStart/Stop function until the battery hasbeen adequately recharged.
For more information about recharging thebattery, see the section "Battery" in thechapter "Maintenance and service".
09 Maintenance and service
Replacing bulbs 09
234
General
All bulb specifications are given on page 300.
The following list contains locations of bulbsand other light sources that are specialised orunsuitable for changing except at a workshop:
• Active Xenon headlamps - ABL (Xenonlamps)
• Daytime running lights (DRL) in the spoiler
• Direction indicators, door mirror andapproach lighting
• Reading lamps, courtesy lighting and glo-vebox lighting
• General interior lighting in the roof
• Brake light
WARNING
On cars with Xenon headlamps, thereplacement of Xenon lamps must be car-ried out at a workshop - an authorised Volvoworkshop is recommended. Working withXenon lamps demands extreme cautionbecause the headlamp is equipped with ahigh voltage unit.
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs withyour fingers. Grease and oil from your fin-gers are vaporised by the heat, coating thereflector and then causing damage.
Changing front bulbs
All front bulbs (except for fog lamps) arechanged by first removing the lamp housingfrom the engine compartment.
Removing the lamp housing
1. Remove the remote control key and turnthe light switch to position 0.
2. Withdraw the lamp housing's locking pin.
IMPORTANT
Do not pull the electrical cable, only the con-nector.
3. Pull the lamp housing to the side and thenforward.
4. Unplug the connector by pressing downthe clip with a thumb while moving out theconnector with the other hand.
5. Lift out the lamp housing and place it on asoft surface to avoid scratching the lens.
Fitting the lamp housing
1. Plug in the connector and refit the lamphousing and locking pin. Check that the pinis correctly inserted.
2. Check the lighting.
The lamp housing must be plugged in andsecured in place before the lighting is switched
09 Maintenance and service
Replacing bulbs 09
��
235
on or the remote control key inserted into theignition switch.
Dipped beam
Removing the cover and bulb
1. Remove the entire lamp housing.
2. Bend aside the catches and remove thecover.
3. Release the spring clip securing the bulb.First, press it to the left to release it, thenout and down.
4. Pull out the bulb.
Fitting a new bulb
1. Fit the new bulb. It can only fit in one posi-tion.
2. Press the spring clip in/up and then slightlyto the right in order to snap it into position.
3. Press the connector back on.
4. Refit the plastic cover.
5. Refit the lamp housing, see page 234.
Main beam
1. Remove the entire lamp housing.
2. Left-hand headlamp:
turn the bulb holder anticlockwise.
Right-hand headlamp:
turn the bulb holder clockwise.
3. Withdraw the bulb holder and change thebulb.
4. Refit the bulb holder. It can only be refittedin one position.
5. Refit the lamp housing.
09 Maintenance and service
Replacing bulbs 09
236
Position/parking lamps
1. Twist the bulb holder anticlockwise andwithdraw it. Replace the bulb.
2. Refit the bulb holder. It can only be refittedin one position.
Direction indicators
1. Twist the bulb holder anticlockwise andremove it.
2. To remove the bulb from the bulb holder,press the bulb in and turn it anticlockwise.
3. Fit a new bulb and refit the bulb holder intothe lamp housing.
Side marker lamps
1. Twist the bulb holder anticlockwise andwithdraw it. Replace the bulb.
2. Refit the bulb holder. It can only fit in oneposition.
09 Maintenance and service
Replacing bulbs 09
237
Front fog lamps
1. Switch off all lights and turn the remotecontrol key to position 0.
2. Pull the cover straight out in the directionof the centre of the car using a tool, see theillustration above.> (Loosen the clips (1) and pull straight out
(2).)
3. Remove the screw securing the lamphousing and take out the lamp housing.
4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
5. Turn the bulb anticlockwise and pull it out.
6. Fit the new bulb and turn it clockwise.
7. Refit the bulb holder. The TOP mark on thebulb holder must always be upward.
8. Secure the lamp housing with the screwand press the panel back into place.
Removing the bulb holder
All bulbs in the rear lamp cluster are replacedfrom inside the cargo area.
1. Switch off all lights and turn the remotecontrol key to position 0.
2. Remove the cover (A or B) in the left/right-hand panel to access the bulbs.
3. The bulbs are located in separate bulbholders.
4. Unplug the connector from the bulb holder.
5. Press the catches together and pull out thebulb holder.
6. Replace the bulb.
7. Plug in the connector.
8. Press the bulb holder into place and refitthe cover (A or B).
NOTE
If an error message remains after the brokenbulb has been replaced then we recom-mend that you visit an authorised Volvoworkshop.
09 Maintenance and service
Replacing bulbs 09
238
Location of bulbs in the rear bulbholder
Brake light
Position/parking and rear fog lamps
Position/parking lamps
Reversing lamp
Direction indicators
Position/parking lamps
NOTE
The rear fog lamp only illuminates in the leftrear light cluster on a left-hand drive car andin the right on a right-hand drive.
Number plate lighting
1. Switch off all lights and turn the remotecontrol key to position 0.
2. Remove the screws with a screwdriver.
3. Detach the lens carefully.
4. Replace the bulb.
5. Refit and screw in the lens.
Cargo area
G007613
1. Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so thatthe lamp housing comes loose.
2. Remove the blown bulb.
3. Fit a new bulb.
09 Maintenance and service
Replacing bulbs 09
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 239
Passenger compartment lighting in
cargo area
G010326
Cargo area lighting also includes a further lampon the left-hand side of the cargo area.
1. Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so thatthe lens detaches.
2. Unplug the connector from the bulb holder.
Vanity mirror lighting*
G020253
Removing the mirror glass
1. Insert a screwdriver underneath the loweredge, in the centre. Carefully prize up thelug on the edge.
2. Insert the screwdriver underneath the edgeon the left and right-hand sides (by theblack rubber sections), and prize carefullyso that the glass comes loose in the loweredge.
3. Carefully detach and lift aside the entiremirror glass and cover.
4. Remove the blown bulb and replace it witha new one.
Fitting the mirror glass
1. First, press the three lugs at top edge ofmirror glass back into position.
2. Then press the three lower lugs back intoposition.
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses 09
240
General
All electrical functions and components arefused to protect the car's electrical systemfrom damage by short circuiting and overload-ing.
The fuses are in two different locations in thecar:
• Relay/Fuse box in the engine compart-ment.
• Relay/Fuse box in the passenger compart-ment.
Changing
If an electrical component or function does notwork, it may be because the component's fusewas temporarily overloaded and blew.
1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse.
2. Pull out the fuse and check from the sideto see whether the curved wire has blown.
3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuseof the same colour and amperage.
Each fuse box has space for several sparefuses. If the same fuse fails repeatedly thenthere is a fault in the component. In which case,Volvo recommends that you visit an authorisedVolvo workshop for this to be checked.
WARNING
Never use a foreign object, or a fuse with anamperage higher than that specified whenreplacing a fuse. This could cause signifi-cant damage to the electrical system andpossibly lead to fire.
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses 09
��
241
Relay/fuse box in the engine compartment
G007446
The fuse box has 36 fuse positions. Be sure toreplace a blown fuse with a new fuse of thesame colour and amperage.
• Fuses 19-36 are of the "Mini Fuse" type.
• Fuses 7-18 are of the "JCASE" type andshould be replaced by a workshop.1
• Fuses 1-6 are of the "Midi Fuse" type andmust only be replaced by a workshop.1
On the inside of the cover there are tweezersthat facilitate the procedure for the removaland fitting of fuses.
1 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses 09
242 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
G020250
1. Cooling fan 50 A
2. Power steering 80 A
3. Supply to passenger compart-ment fuse box 60 A
4. Supply to passenger compart-ment fuse box 60 A
5. PTC element, air preheater* 80 A
6. Glow plugs (DRIVe) 60 A
Glow plugs (5-cyl. diesel) 70 A
7. ABS pump 40 A
8. ABS valves 20 A
9. Engine functions 30 A
10. Ventilation fan 40 A
11. Headlamp washers 20 A
12. Heated rear window 30 A
13. Actuator solenoid, startermotor 30 A
14. Trailer wiring* 40 A
15. Reserve –
16. Infotainment system 30 A
17. Windscreen wipers 30 A
18. Supply to passenger compart-ment fuse box 40 A
19. Reserve –
20. Horn 15 A
21. Fuel-driven additional heater,passenger compartmentheater* 20 A
22. Reserve –
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses 09
��
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 243
23. Engine control module (5-cyl.petrol), Transmission controlmodule (5-cyl.) 10 A
Transmission control module(4-cyl.) 15 A
24. Heated fuel filter (5-cyl. diesel),PTC element, oil trap (5-cyl.diesel) 20 A
25. Central electronic module(CEM) (Start/Stop) 10 A
26. Ignition switch 15 A
27. A/C compressor 10 A
28. Reserve –
29. Front fog lamps
Daytime running lights (DRL)* 15 A
30. Coolant pump (Start/Stop) 10 A
31. Voltage regulator, alternator(4-cyl. petrol) 10 A
32. Injectors (5-cyl. petrol), Turbocontrol valve (5-cyl. diesel), Oillevel sensor (5-cyl. diesel)
Control valve, fuel flow(DRIVe), Mass air flow sensor(DRIVe), Control motor turbo(DRIVe) 10 A
33. Vacuum pump (5-cyl. petrol),Relay coil, relay, vacuumpump (5-cyl. petrol), Enginecontrol module (5-cyl. diesel),Heated fuel filter (DRIVe) 20 A
34. Ignition coils (petrol), Pressureswitch, climate control system(5-cyl.), Control module, glowplugs (5-cyl. diesel), EGRemission control (5-cyl. diesel),Fuel pump (DRIVe), Lambda-sond (DRIVe), Engine controlmodule (Start/Stop), Relaycoils, relays Start/Stop 10 A
35. Relay coil, relay, climate con-trol system, PTC element, oiltrap (5-cyl. petrol), Mass airflow sensor (5-cyl. petrol),Turbo control valve (5-cyl. pet-rol), Solenoids, variable valvetiming (5-cyl. petrol), Injectors(2.0 l petrol), EVAP valve (2.0 lpetrol), Valve, air/fuel mixture(2.0 l petrol), Control valve, fuelpressure (5-cyl. diesel), Enginecontrol module (5-cyl. diesel),Engine EGR (DRIVe) 15 A
36. Engine control module (petrol,DRIVe), Accelerator pedalposition sensor (5-cyl. diesel),Lambda-sond (5-cyl. diesel) 10 A
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses 09
244 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
DRIVe Start/Stop*
Location of fuses for the Start/Stop function.
No. Component A
11M/1 Engine compartment,electrical distributionunit
125
11M/2 Sensor, battery monitor-ing
15
25 Central electronic mod-ule (CEM) (Referencevoltage standby bat-tery), diesel engine
10
For more information on DRIVe Start/Stop -see page 163.
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses 09
245
Relay/Fuse box in the passenger compartment
G020601
The fuse box has 50 fuse positions. The fusesare located under the glovebox. The box alsoprovides space for several spare fuses. Toolsfor fuse replacement are located in the relay/fuse box in the engine compartment, seepage 241.
Replacing fuses
1. Remove the trim concealing the fuse boxby pressing in the pin in the centre of theclips (1) about one cm and then withdraw-ing the clips.
2. Turn the two wing screws (that secure thefuse box) (2) anticlockwise and removethem.
3. Lower the fuse box (3) half way. Pull ittowards the seat until it stops. Lower it
completely. The fuse box can be fullyunhooked.
4. Close the fuse box in the reverse order.
5. Remove the pins from the centre of theclips. Fit the trim and the clips. Reinsert thepins into the clips. This expands the clipsand secures the trim.
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses 09
246 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
43. Telematics*, Audio system,RTI*, Bluetooth* 15 A
44. SRS system, Engine controlmodule (5-cyl, DRIVe) 10 A
45. Electrical socket, passengercompartment 15 A
46. Passenger compartment, glo-vebox and courtesy lighting 5 A
47. Interior lighting, Remote con-trolled garage door opener* 5 A
48. Washer, rear window 15 A
49. SRS system 10 A
50. Reserve –
51. PTC element, air preheater*,Relay coil, relay, heated fuelfilter (5-cyl. diesel) 10 A
52. Transmission control module,ABS system 5 A
53. Power steering 10 A
54. Parking assistance*, Xenon* 10 A
55. Control module Keyless* 20 A
56. Remote control receiver,Siren* 10 A
57. Data link connector (DLC),brake light switch 15 A
58. Main beam, right, Relay coil,relay, auxiliary lamps* 7.5 A
59. Main beam, left 7.5 A
60. Seat heating (driver's side) 15 A
61. Seat heating (passenger side) 15 A
62. Sunroof* 20 A
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses 09
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 247
63. Reserve –
64. Reserve –
65. Audio, Infotainment 5 A
66. Audio, Infotainment, Climatecontrol system 10 A
67. Reserve –
68. Cruise control 5 A
69. Climate control system, Rainsensor, Buttons for BLIS*,parking assistance*, DRIVe 5 A
70. Reserve –
71. Reserve –
72. Reserve –
73. Sunroof*, Overhead consolefor interior lighting, Seatbeltreminder, rear, Dimming, inte-rior rearview mirror* 5 A
74. Fuel pump 15 A
75. Reserve –
76. Reserve –
77. Reserve –
78. Reserve –
79. Reversing lamp, Dimming,interior rearview mirror (signal) 5 A
80. Reserve -
81. Reserve –
82. Supply to front right door 25 A
83. Supply to front left door 25 A
84. Power seat, passenger 25 A
85. Power seat, driver 25 A
86. Interior lighting, cargo arealighting, power seats, fuellevel display (2.0F) 5 A
248 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General.................................................................................................. 250Audio functions..................................................................................... 252Radio functions..................................................................................... 257CD functions......................................................................................... 262Menu structure – audio system............................................................. 265Phone functions*................................................................................... 266Menu structure – phone*....................................................................... 273Bluetooth handsfree*............................................................................ 276
INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM
10 Infotainment system
General
10
250 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Infotainment system
G020245
POWER - Pushbutton, audio system on/off
Display
Keypad
MENU - Goes to the menu system
Navigation buttons
EXIT - Exits the menu system
ENTER - Selects/activates/deactivates
Infotainment is a system that integrates theaudio system and phone*. The infotainment
system can be easily operated using the con-trol panel or the steering wheel keypad*, seepage 70. The display (2) shows messages andinformation on the current function.
Audio system
On/Off
POWER (1) starts/switches off the audio sys-tem. If the audio system is active when theremote control key is turned to position 0 thenit continues to be active until the remote controlkey is removed from the ignition switch. Theaudio system is started automatically the nexttime the remote control key is turned to posi-tion I.
Menus
Some infotainment system functions are con-trolled via a menu system. The current menulevel is shown at the top right of the display.Menu options are shown in the middle of thedisplay.
• MENU (4) leads to the menu system.
• Up/down with the navigation button (5)moves between menu options.
• ENTER (7) selects/activates/deactivatesone of the menu options.
• EXIT (6) leads back one step in the menustructure. A long press on EXIT will exit themenu system.
Shortcuts
Menu options are numbered and can also beselected directly with the keypad (3). So firstpress MENU and then the figure/figures for thedesired menu option.
Equipment
The audio system can be equipped with differ-ent options and different versions. There arethree audio system versions:
• Performance,
• High Performance* or
• Premuim Sound*
However, FM radio with RDS, AM radio and CDplayer are included in all audio systems.
10 Infotainment system
General
10
251
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II 1
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II distributes thetwo stereo audio channels to left, centre, rightand rear speakers. This provides a more real-istic sound quality than that provided by stand-ard two-channel stereo.
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II and the Dolbyicon are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II System is manu-factured under license from Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.
1 Premium Sound.
10 Infotainment system
Audio functions
10
252 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Audio controls
VOLUME - Knob
AM/FM – Audio source selection
MODE - Audio source selection, CD, AUX,USB (e.g. iPod )1 and BT*
TUNING - Knob
SOUND - Button
Navigation button - Menus
Volume
Use VOLUME (1) or the steering wheel keypadto regulate the volume, see page 70. Audio vol-
ume adjusts automatically depending on vehi-cle speed, see page 255.
Audio source selection
Repeatedly pressing AM/FM switchesbetween FM1, FM2 and AM.
Repeatedly pressing MODE changes betweenCD, USB, AUX and BT.
External audio sources
AUX, USB*
General
AUX input
USB input*
The AUX and USB inputs enable the connec-tion of an external audio source, e.g. aniPod 1 or MP3 player.
If you choose to connect an iPod , MP3 playeror a USB memory stick to the USB connectionthen you can control the media via the car'saudio controls.
1 USB only applies for High Performance and Premium Sound. The iPod trademark belongs to Apple Computer Inc.
10 Infotainment system
Audio functions
10
253
Use the MODE button to select the externalaudio source you wish to use.
1. If USB is selected then Connect device isshown in the display.
2. Connect your iPod , MP3 player or USBmemory stick to the USB connection in thecentre console's storage compartment(see preceding illustration).> The text Loading appears on the dis-
play when the system loads the filestructure on the storage media. Thistakes a while.
When the loading is finished the track informa-tion is shown on the display and it is possibleto select the track required.
Track selection can take place in the followingthree ways:
• Select TUNING (4) clockwise or anticlock-wise.
• Use the right or left-hand button (6) of thenavigation control to scroll to the desiredtrack.
• With the steering wheel keypad.
In USB or iPod mode the infotainment systemoperates in an equivalent way to theCD player for playing back music files. Formore information, see page 262.
NOTE
The system supports the playback of musicfiles in the MP3, WMA and WAV file formats.However, there are variants of these file for-mats that are not supported by the system.The system also supports most iPod mod-els produced in 2005 or later. iPod Shuffleis not supported.
USB memory
To facilitate the use of USB memory avoid stor-ing any files other than music files in the mem-ory. It takes considerably longer for the systemto load storage media that contains items otherthan playable music files.
NOTE
The system supports removable mediawhich is compatible with USB 2.0 and theFAT32 file system, and can handle a maxi-mum of 500 folders and 64 000 files. Thememory must have a capacity of at least 256Mb.
MP3 player
Many MP3 players have their own file systemsthat are not supported by the audio system. Foruse in the system, an MP3 player must be setin USB Removable device/Mass Storage
Device mode.
iPod
An iPod is charged and supplied with powerby the USB connection via the player's con-nection cable. However, if the player's batteryis completely discharged then it must becharged before the player is connected.
NOTE
When an iPod is used as audio source, thecar's infotainment system has a menustructure that is similar to the iPod player'sown menu structure.
AUX
Sometimes the AUX external audio source canbe heard at a different volume to the internalaudio sources, e.g. the CD player. If the audiovolume of the external audio source is too highthen the sound quality can be impaired. Pre-vent this by adjusting the input volume of theAUX input.
NOTE
The sound quality may be impaired if theplayer is charged while the audio system isin AUX mode, so avoid charging the player.
10 Infotainment system
Audio functions
10
254 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Streaming audio via Bluetooth *
General
If the car is equipped with Bluetooth hands-free* and a mobile phone is connected then theaudio system can wirelessly play back stream-ing audio files from the mobile phone. Naviga-tion and control of the sound can be carried outvia the centre console buttons or via the steer-ing wheel keypad*. In some mobile phones it isalso possible to change tracks from the phone.
To be able to play back the audio a device mustfirst be paired and connected to the car. Forinformation about pairing and connection, seepage 276. BT must also be selected as audiosource, see page 252.
NOTE
The Bluetooth mobile phone must supportthe Audio/Video Remote Control Profile(AVRCP) and Advanced Audio DistributionProfile (A2DP). The phone should useAVRCP version 1.3, A2DP 1.2. Otherwisesome functions may not work.
NOTE
Not all mobile phones available in the mar-ket are fully compatible with theBluetooth function in the car's audio sys-tem. Volvo recommends that you contact anauthorised Volvo dealer or visitwww.volvocars.com for information oncompatible phones and external mediaplayers.
Playback
Press the MODE button repeatedly in order toselect BT as audio source.
Audio file selection can take place in the fol-lowing three ways:
• Select TUNING (4) clockwise or anticlock-wise.
• Use the or button (6) of the naviga-tion control to scroll to the desired audiofile.
• With the or buttons on the steeringwheel keypad.
Audio settings
Adjusting audio settings
Press SOUND (5) repeatedly to browse amongthe following options. Adjust by turningTUNING.
• BASS - Bass level.
• TREBLE - Treble level.
• FADER – Balance between the front andrear speakers.
• BALANCE – Balance between the left andright-hand speakers.
• CENTRE2 - Level for centre speaker.Three channel stereo or Pro Logic II mustbe activated before adjustment is possible,see under the heading Activating/deacti-vating surround sound below.
• SURROUND2 - Level for surround. ProLogic II must be activated before adjust-ment is possible, see under the headingAudio settings below.
2 Premium Sound.
10 Infotainment system
Audio functions
10
��
255
Surround2
Surround settings govern the spatialperception of the sound. Settingsand activating/deactivating are sep-arate for each audio source.
G021216
The Dolby icon in the display indicates thatDolby Pro Logic II is active. There are threedifferent settings for surround sound:
• Dolby Pro Logic II
• 3 channel
• Off - 2 channel stereo.
Activating/deactivating surround sound
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to Audio settings… and pressENTER.
3. Scroll to Surround FM…, Surround
AM…, Surround CD…or Surround
AUX… and press ENTER.
4. Scroll to Dolby Pro Logic II3, 3 channel
or Off and press ENTER.
Equalizer front/rear4
The equalizer can be used to adjust differentfrequency bands separately.
Adjusting equalizer
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to Audio settings… and pressENTER.
3. Scroll to Equalizer front… or Equalizer
rear… and press ENTER.
4. The graphic on the display indicates theaudio level of the frequency in question.
5. Adjust the level with TUNING (4) or up/down with the navigation button. Addi-tional frequencies can be selected usingthe left/right navigation button.
6. Save with ENTER or EXIT to exit withoutsaving the settings.
Automatic volume control5
The auto volume control function allows theaudio volume to increase as the speed of thecar increases. There are three levels to choosefrom: Low, Medium and High.
Adjusting automatic volume control
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to Audio settings… and pressENTER.
3. Scroll to Auto. volume control… andpress ENTER.
4. Scroll to Low, Medium or High and pressENTER.
Optimum sound reproduction
The audio system is calibrated for optimumsound reproduction by means of digital signalprocessing.
This calibration takes into account loudspeak-ers, amplifiers, passenger compartmentacoustics, listener position etc. for each com-bination of car model and audio system.
2 Premium Sound.3 Not available in AM and FM mode.4 Certain audio systems.5 Not Performance
10 Infotainment system
Audio functions
10
256 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
There is a also a dynamic calibration that takesinto account the position of the volume control,radio reception and vehicle speed.
The controls explained in these operatinginstructions, e.g. bass, treble and equalizer*are only intended for the user to be able toadapt the sound reproduction according topersonal taste.
10 Infotainment system
Radio functions
10
��
257
Radio controls
G019806
FM/AM – Wavelength selection
Station presets
TUNING – Knob for station searches
SCAN – Scanning
Navigation button - Tuning and menus
EXIT - Cancel current function
AUTO – Automatic storage of stations
Tuning
Automatic tuning
1. Select wavelength using AM/FM (1).
2. Give a brief press on or .
The radio then automatically searches for thenext strong station.
Manual tuning
1. Select wavelength using AM/FM (1).
2. Adjust the frequency by turning TUNING
(3).
Tune into a station with a long press on or. Or by using the steering wheel keypad:
– Hold in or on the navigation buttondepressed until the desired frequencyappears on the display.
As long as the frequency graphic appears onthe display, searching can be resumed bybriefly pressing or .
Storing stations
Ten station presets can be stored per wave-length. FM has two memories for presets:FM1 and FM2. Preset stations are selectedusing the preset buttons (2) or the steeringwheel keypad.
Storing stations manually
1. Tune into a station.
2. Hold a station preset button depresseduntil the message Station stored appearson the display.
Automatic storage of stations
AUTO (7) seeks out the ten strongest radio sta-tions and stores them automatically in a sepa-rate memory. The function is especially usefulin areas where the radio stations and their fre-quencies are unfamiliar.
Starting automatic storage of stations
1. Select wavelength using AM/FM (1).
2. Hold AUTO (7) depressed untilAutostoring appears on the display.
Once Autostoring disappears from the dis-play, the stations are stored. The radio contin-ues in Auto mode and Auto appears on thedisplay. The automatically stored presets cannow be selected using the preset buttons (2).
Cancelling automatic storage of stations
– Press EXIT (6).
10 Infotainment system
Radio functions
10
258
Selecting an auto-stored preset
Allowing the radio to remain in Auto mode pro-vides access to the autostored presets.
1. Briefly press AUTO (7).> Auto appears on the display.
2. Press a preset button (2).> The radio remains in Auto mode until it
is exited by a brief press on AUTO (7),EXIT (6) or AM/FM (1) cancels Automode.
Storing autostored presets in another
memory
An autostored preset can be transferred to theFM or AM memory.
1. Briefly press AUTO (7).> Auto appears on the display.
2. Press the preset button for the station youwant to move.
3. Press the button under which the stationwill be stored and hold it depressed untilthe message Station stored appears onthe display.> The radio exits Auto mode and the
stored station can be selected as a pre-set.
Scanning
SCAN (4) automatically searches through awavelength for strong stations. When a stationis found, it is played for approx. 8 secondsbefore scanning is resumed.
Activating/deactivating Scan
1. Select wavelength using AM/FM.
2. Press SCAN to activate.> SCAN appears on the display. Close
using SCAN or EXIT.
Storing a station
A selected station can be stored as a presetwhile SCAN is active.
– Press a station preset button and hold itdepressed until the message Station
stored appears on the display.> Scanning is interrupted and the stored
station can be selected as a preset.
RDS functions1
Radio Data System - RDS links FM transmittersinto a network. An FM transmitter in such anetwork sends information that gives anRDS radio the following functions:
• Automatically switches to a stronger trans-mitter if reception in the area is poor.
• Searches for programme form, such astraffic information or news.
• Receives text information on current radioprogramme.
Some radio stations do not use RDS or onlysome if its functionality.
Programme functions
In FM mode, the radio can search for stationswith certain programme types. If a requiredprogramme type is located the radio canswitch stations interrupting the audio sourcecurrently in use. For example, if the CD playeris in use, it is paused. The interrupting trans-mission is played at a preset audio volume, seepage 261. The radio returns to the previousaudio source and audio volume when the setprogramme type is no longer broadcast.
The programme functions alarm (ALARM!),traffic information (TP), news (News), and pro-
1 The RDS functions available vary in the different markets.
10 Infotainment system
Radio functions
10
��
259
gramme types (PTY) interrupt one another inorder of priority, where alarm has the highestpriority and programme types has the lowest.
If you want to return to the interrupted audiosource before the message or programme typehas been completed, press EXIT.
For further programme interruption settings,see EON and REG see page 260. The pro-gramme functions are modified via the menusystem, see page 250.
Alarm
This function is used to warn of serious acci-dents and catastrophes. The alarm cannot betemporarily interrupted or deactivated. Themessage ALARM! appears on the displaywhen an alarm message is transmitted.
Traffic information – TP
This function allows traffic informa-tion broadcast within a set station'sRDS network to break through. TP
shows that the function has beenactivated. If the set station can send trafficinformation then appears on the display.
G021220
Activating/deactivating TP
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to TP and press ENTER.
TP from current station/all stations
The radio can interrupt with traffic informationfrom only the set (current) station or from allstations.
1. Select an FM station.
2. Press MENU and then ENTER.
3. Scroll to Advanced radio settings… andpress ENTER.
4. Scroll to TP and press ENTER.
5. Scroll to TP station… and press ENTER.> Either TP from current station or TP
from all stations is shown on the dis-play.
6. Press ENTER.
Activating/deactivating TP search
TP search is useful during long journeys whilean audio source other than the radio is beingplayed. The function automatically searchesfor traffic information within differentRDS networks.
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to Advanced radio settings… andpress ENTER.
3. Scroll to TP and press ENTER.
4. Scroll to TP search and press ENTER.
News
This function allows news broad-casts within a set station'sRDS network to break through. Themessage News shows that the func-
tion is active.
G021221
Activating/deactivating News
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to News and press ENTER.
News from current station/all stations
The radio can interrupt with news from only theset (current) station or from all stations.
1. Select an FM station.
2. Press MENU and then ENTER.
3. Scroll to Advanced radio settings… andpress ENTER.
4. Scroll to News station… and pressENTER.> Either News from current station or
News from all stations is shown on thedisplay.
5. Press ENTER.
10 Infotainment system
Radio functions
10
260
Programme types – PTY
The PTY function can be used toselect different programme types,such as Pop music and Serious
classic. The PTY symbol indicatesthat the function is active. This function allowsprogramme types broadcast within a set sta-tion's RDS network to break through.
G021222
Activating/deactivating PTY
1. Select FM1 or FM2 with FM/AM.
2. Press MENU and then ENTER.
3. Scroll to PTY and press ENTER.
4. Scroll to Select PTY… and pressENTER.> A list of programme types appears:
Current affairs, Information etc. ThePTY function is activated by selectingprogramme types and deactivated byclearing all PTYs.
5. Select the desired programme types orClear all PTY…
Search PTY
This function searches the entire wavelengthfor the selected programme type.
1. Activate PTY.
2. Press MENU and then ENTER.
3. Scroll to PTY and press ENTER.
4. Scroll to Search PTY and press ENTER.
If the radio finds any of the selected pro-gramme types, >| To seek appears on the dis-play. Press the navigation button to con-tinue searching for another broadcast of theselected programme types.
Display of programme type
The programme type of the current station canbe shown on the display.
NOTE
Not all radio stations support this function.
Activating/deactivating display
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to PTY and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Show PTY and press ENTER.
Radio text
Some RDS stations transmit information onprogramme content, artists, etc. This informa-tion can be shown on the display.
Activating/deactivating radio text
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to Radio text and press ENTER.
Automatic frequency update – AF
The AF function selects one of the strongesttransmitters for a set station. The radio maysometimes need to search through the entireFM wavelength to find a strong transmitter. Ifthis occurs, the radio mutes and PI seekEXIT
to cancel appears in the display.
Activating/deactivating AF
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to Advanced radio settings… andpress ENTER.
3. Scroll to AF and press ENTER.
Regional radio programmes – REG
This function causes the radio to con-tinue with a regional transmitter evenif its signal strength is low.Regional indicates that the function
is active. The regional function is normallydeactivated.
G021223
Activating/deactivating REG
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to Advanced radio settings… andpress ENTER.
3. Scroll to Regional and press ENTER.
10 Infotainment system
Radio functions
10
261
Enhanced Other Networks – EON
The EON function is especially useful in urbanareas with many regional radio stations. Itallows the distance between the car and theradio station transmitter to determine whenprogramme functions should interrupt the cur-rent audio source.
• Local – interrupts only if the radio stationtransmitter is close.
• Distant – interrupts if the station transmit-ter is far away, even if there is a lot of static.
• Off – no interruption for programmes fromother transmitters.
Activating/deactivating EON
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to Advanced radio settings… andpress ENTER.
3. Scroll to EON… and press ENTER.
4. Scroll to Local, Distant or Off and pressENTER.
Resetting RDS functions
Resets all radio settings to the original factorysettings.
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to Advanced radio settings… andpress ENTER.
3. Scroll to Reset all… and press ENTER.
Volume control, programme types
The interrupting programme types are heard atthe volume selected for each programme type.If the volume level is adjusted during the pro-gramme interruption, the new level is saveduntil the next programme interruption.
10 Infotainment system
CD functions
10
262 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
CD function controls
G019807
Navigation button – Fast forward/rewind,track selection and menus
CD changer position selection*
CD insertion/eject
CD insertion/eject slot
MODE - Selection of audio source (CD,AUX, USB*)
TUNING - Knob for track selection
Starting playback (CD player)
If a music CD is in the player when the audiosystem is in CD mode then playback is started
automatically. Otherwise, load a disc andchange to CD mode by pressing MODE.
Start playback (CD changer*)
If a CD position with a music CD is alreadyselected when the audio system is activatedthen playback starts automatically. Otherwisechange to CD changer mode using MODE andselect a disc with the number buttons 1–6 orUp/Down on the navigation button.
Insert a CD
1. Select an empty position with buttons 1–
6 or Up/Down on the navigation button.> An empty position is marked on the dis-
play. The text Insert disc shows that anew disc can be inserted. TheCD changer can hold up to 6 CD discs.
2. Inserting a CD in the CD changer.
CD eject
A CD will stay in the ejected position forapprox. 12 seconds. Following which it is re-inserted in the player and playback continues.
Eject individual discs by pressing the eject but-ton (3).
Eject all discs with a long press on the ejectbutton. The entire magazine is emptied disc bydisc. The message EJECT ALL is shown in thedisplay.
Pause
If the volume is turned down completely, theCD player is stopped. The player is restartedwhen volume is increased.
Audio files*
The CD player/CD changer* also supports MP3and WMA format audio files.
NOTE
Certain types of copy-protected audio filescannot be read by the player.
When a CD containing audio files is insertedinto the player the disc's folder structure is loa-ded in. It may take a while before playbackstarts due to the quality of the disc.
Navigation and playback
If a disc with audio files is inserted in theCD player then the disc's folder structure isshown by pressing ENTER. The folder struc-ture is navigated in the same way as the audiosystem's menu structure. Audio files have thesymbol and folders have the symbol .Start audio file playback with ENTER.
When the playback of a file is finished the play-back of the other files in the same folder con-tinues. Folder change takes place automati-
10 Infotainment system
CD functions
10
263
cally when all files in the current folder havebeen played back.
Press left/right on the navigation button if thedisplay is not wide enough to show the wholeaudio file name.
Fast-wind/change CD tracks and audio
files
Short presses right/left on the navigation but-ton are used to scroll betweenCD tracks/audio files. Long presses are usedto fast-wind CD tracks/audio files. TUNING (orthe steering wheel keypad) can also be usedfor this purpose.
Scan CD
This function plays the first 10 seconds of eachCD track/audio file. Press SCAN to activate.Interrupt with EXIT or SCAN to continue play-back of the current CD track/audio file.
Random
This function plays the tracks in random order.The random CD tracks/audio files can be scrol-led through in the normal way.
NOTE
It is only possible to scroll between randomCD tracks 1 on the current disc.
Different messages appear on the displaydepending on which random function has beenselected:
• RANDOM means that the tracks from onlyone music CD are played
• RND ALL means that all tracks on allmusic CDs in the CD changer are played.
• RND FLD means that the audio files in afolder on the current CD are played.
Activating/deactivating, random (CD
player)
If a normal music CD is being played:
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to Random and press ENTER.
If a disc with audio files is being played:
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to Random and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Folder or Disc and pressENTER.
Activating/deactivating, random (CD
changer)
If a normal music CD is being played:
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to Random and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Single disc or All discs and pressENTER.
The option All discs only applies to the musicCDs in the changer.
If a CD with audio files is being played:
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to Random and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Single disc or Folder and pressENTER.
The function is deactivated when another CDis selected.
Disc text
If title information is stored on a music CD thenit can be shown on the display2.
Activate/deactivate
1. Start CD playback.
2. Press MENU and then ENTER.
3. Scroll to Disc text and press ENTER.
1 Applies to the CD changer.2 Applies to CD changer.
10 Infotainment system
CD functions
10
264
CDs
Using low quality CD discs could result in pooror non-existent sound.
IMPORTANT
Only use standard discs (12 cm in diameter).Do not use CD discs with adhesive disclabels. The heat in the CD player may causethe label to come off, damaging theCD player.
10 Infotainment system
Menu structure – audio system
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 265
Overview
FM MENU1
1. News
2. TP
3. PTY…
4. Radio text
5. Advanced radio settings…
6.* Audio settings…
AM MENU
1.* Audio settings…
CD MENU
For CD player with CD disc.
1. Random
2. News
3. TP
4. Disc text
5.* Audio settings…
CD MENU
For CD player with MP3 disc.
1. Playlist
2. Random…
3. News
4. TP
5. Disc text
6.* Audio settings…
CD MENU
For CD changer* with CD discselected.
1. Random…
2. News
3. TP
4. Disc text
5.* Audio settings…
CD MENU
For CD changer* with MP3 discselected.
1. Playlist
2. Random…
3. News
4. TP
5. Disc text
6.* Audio settings…
AUX MENU
1. AUX input volume…
2. News
3. TP
4.* Audio settings…
USB MENU*
1. Playlist
2. Random…
3. News
4. TP
5. Track information
6. Audio settings…
1 The RDS functions available vary in the different markets.
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
10
266 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Phone system components.
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 267
Phone system components
Antenna1
Steering wheel keypad. Most phone sys-tem functions can be accessed via the key-pad. see page 268.
Microphone. The microphone for hands-free is fitted in the roof by the sun visor.
Centre console control panel. All phonefunctions (except call volume) can be regu-lated via the control panel.
SIM card reader
General
• Always put traffic safety first.
• Switch off the phone system when refuel-ling the car.
• Switch off the system near blasting work.
• Volvo recommends that an authorisedVolvo workshop carries out phone systemservicing.
Emergency calls
Emergency calls to alarm centres can be madewithout a SIM card as long as there is coverageby a network operator.
Making an emergency call
1. Activate the phone.
2. Ring the emergency number that applies toyour region (within EU: 112).
3. Press ENTER.
IDIS
With the IDIS system (Intelligent DriverInformation System), incoming phone calls andSMS messages can be delayed so that con-centration can be focused on driving when IDISdetermines that the traffic situation requires ahigh level of attention.
Incoming calls and SMS messages can bedelayed 5 seconds before they are diverted. Ifthe current traffic situation still requires a highlevel of attention from the driver then theincoming call is diverted to the voice mail.Missed calls are shown in the display.
IDIS be disconnected using menu function 6.5,see page 273.
SIM card
G020244
The phone can only be used with a valid SIMcard Subscriber Identity Module. Cards areavailable from various network operators. Con-tact your network operator if you experiencedifficulties with the SIM card.
NOTE
The built-in phone cannot read 3G type SIMcards (3G only). Combined 3G/GSM cardswork. Contact your network operator if areplacement SIM card is required.
1 Available only for built-in phone or RTI.
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
10
268 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Extra SIM card
Many network operators offer two SIM cardsfor the same phone number. The extra SIMcard can be used in the car.
Inserting the SIM card
1. Switch off the phone and open the glove-box.
2. Pull out the SIM card holder from the SIMcard reader, see illustration on page 267.
3. Position the SIM card in the holder with themetal surface visible. The bevelled edge ofthe SIM card should align with the bevel ofthe SIM card holder.
4. Carefully press in the SIM card holder.
Menus
Page 273 describes how to control phonefunctions with the menu system.
Traffic safety
For safety reasons, parts of the phone menusystem cannot be accessed at speeds inexcess of 8 km/h.
Phone controls
G019809
Centre console control panel.
VOLUME - Control the background vol-ume from the radio, for example, during acall
Number and letter buttons
MENU - Opens the main menu
EXIT - End/refuse calls, clear entered char-acters
Navigation button – Scroll in menus andcharacter rows
ENTER – Accept calls. A press of the but-ton reveals latest dialled numbers
PHONE - On/off and standby mode
Steering wheel keypad
G020243
When the phone is active, the steering wheelkeypad is locked to phone functions. To con-trol the audio system, the phone must be instandby mode (standby).
ENTER – Accept calls. A press of the but-ton reveals latest dialled numbers.
EXIT - End/refuse calls, clear entered char-acters. Changes between the audio menuand the phone menu.
Call volume – Increase/decrease
Navigation buttons – Scroll in menus
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
10
��
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 269
On/Off
A handset appears in the display when thephone system is active or in standby mode(standby). If the remote control key is turned toposition 0 when the phone is in one of thesemodes, the phone automatically resumes thismode the next time the remote control key isturned to position I or II.
Activating the phone system
Phone system functions can only be usedwhen the phone is in active mode.
1. Press PHONE.
2. Enter the PIN code (if necessary) and pressENTER.
Deactivating the phone system
No calls can be received when the phone sys-tem is deactivated.
– Hold PHONE depressed until the phone isdeactivated.
Standby mode (standby)
In standby mode, the audio system can be inuse while calls are received. However, it is notpossible to make calls when in standby mode.
Putting the phone in standby mode
The phone must first be in active mode beforeit can be put in standby mode.
– Press PHONE.
Activating from standby mode
– Press PHONE.
Making and receiving calls
To call
1. Activate the phone system (if necessary).
2. Dial the number or use the phone book,see page 271.
3. Press ENTER.
Receiving a call
For Auto answer, see menu option 4.3, seepage 273.
– Press ENTER.
Ending a call
– Press EXIT.
Refusing a call
– Press EXIT.
Call waiting
A two-tone signal during a phone call indicatesthat there is another incoming call. Answer? isshown in the display. The call can be refusedor taken in the normal manner. If the incomingcall is taken, the previous call is put on hold.
Putting a call on hold/resuming a call
1. Press MENU or ENTER.
2. Scroll to Hold or Resume and pressENTER.
Dialling a third party
1. Put the call on hold.
2. Dial the number of the third party.
Switching between calls
1. Press MENU or ENTER.
2. Scroll to Swap and press ENTER.
Starting a conference call
A conference call consists of three parties thatcan talk to one another. Once a conference callhas been initiated, no more parties can be con-nected. All calls are ended when a conferencecall is ended.
1. Start two phone calls.
2. Press MENU or ENTER.
3. Scroll to Join and press ENTER.
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
10
270 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Volume
The phone uses the driver's door speaker.
Call volume
Call volume is regulated withthe steering wheel keypad.
Audio system volume
Audio system volume is temporarily loweredduring a phone call. Once the call is ended theprevious volume is resumed. If the volume isregulated during the call, the new level isretained once the call is ended. Sound can alsobe automatically muted during a phone call,see menu 6.4.3, on page 273. This functiononly applies to the Volvo integrated phone sys-tem.
Entering text
Text is entered using the phone keypad.
1. Press the key with the desired character -once for the first character on the button,twice for the second, etc. See table.
2. Press 1 for a space. If two characters in arow are to be entered using the same but-ton, press * or wait a few seconds.
A short press on EXIT deletes an input char-acter. A long press on EXIT will clear all enteredcharacters.
Key Function
space 1 - ? ! , . : " ' ( )
a b c 2 ä å à æ ç
d e f 3 è é
g h i 4 ì
j k l 5
m n o 6 ñ ö ò Ø
p q r s 7 ß
t u v 8 ü ù
w x y z 9
Pressed briefly if two char-acters shall be entered aftereach other with the samekey.
Key Function
+ 0 @ * # & $ £ / %
Switch between upper andlower case.
Handling numbers
Calling the last number dialled
The phone automatically stores the last phonenumbers dialled.
1. Press ENTER.
2. Scroll to a number and press ENTER.
Phonebook
If the phone book contains a live caller's con-tact information then this is shown in the dis-play. Contact information can be stored on theSIM card and in the phone.
Storing contacts in the phone book
1. Press MENU.
2. Scroll to Phone book… and pressENTER.
3. Scroll to New contact and press ENTER.
4. Enter a name and press ENTER.
5. Enter a number and press ENTER.
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 271
6. Scroll to SIM card or Phone memory andpress ENTER.
Searching for contacts in the phone book
Use the down arrow of the navigation buttoninstead of MENU for direct access to theSearch menu.
1. Press MENU.
2. Scroll to Phone book… and pressENTER.
3. Scroll to Search and press ENTER.
4. Enter the first few letters of the item andpress ENTER, or simply press ENTER.
5. Scroll to an item and press ENTER.
Copying entries between the SIM card
and Phone book
1. Press MENU.
2. Scroll to Phone book… and pressENTER.
3. Scroll to Copy all… and press ENTER.
4. Scroll to SIM to phone or Phone to SIM
and press ENTER.
Deleting contacts from the phone book
1. Press MENU.
2. Scroll to Phone book… and pressENTER.
3. Scroll to Search and press ENTER.
4. Enter the first few letters of the item andpress ENTER, or simply press ENTER.
5. Scroll to the item to be erased and pressENTER.
6. Scroll to Erase and press ENTER.
Erase all contacts
1. Press MENU.
2. Scroll to Phone book… and pressENTER.
3. Scroll to Erase SIM or Erase phone andpress ENTER.
If required, enter phone code. The factory-setdefault code is 1234.
Speed dial
A keypad button (1–9) can be used as a speeddial number for a contact in the phone book.
1. Press MENU.
2. Scroll to Phone book… and pressENTER.
3. Scroll to Speed dial… and press ENTER.
4. Scroll to Select numbers and pressENTER.
5. Scroll to the digit of the keypad button forthe speed dial number and press ENTER.
6. Enter the first few letters of the item andpress ENTER, or simply press ENTER.
7. Scroll to an item and press ENTER.
8. Hold EXIT depressed to leave the menusystem.
Calling using speed dial
– Briefly press the required keypad button,followed by ENTER.
NOTE
It takes a short time before speed diallingbecomes available after the phone has beenactivated.
To use the speed dial function Speed dial…
must be activated in the Phone book… menu,see page 275.
Calling from the phone book
1. Press MENU.
2. Scroll to Phone book… and pressENTER.> All contacts in the phone book memory
are displayed. The number of contactsdisplayed can be reduced by enteringpart of the contact's name.
3. Scroll to a contact and press ENTER.
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
10
272 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
NOTE
Press ENTER to dial.
NOTE
Hold in the required letter/button in the key-pad for about 2 seconds to reach the cor-responding letter in the phone book.
Functions during a call
Several functions are available during a call.Some functions can only be used when a callis on hold.
Press MENU or ENTER during a call to accessthe In-call menu and scroll to one of the fol-lowing alternatives:
1. Mute microphone/Microphone on –Mute mode.
2. Hold/Resume - Put a call on hold orresume a call.
3. Phone book – Show phone book.
4. Join – Conference calling (available if morethan two parties are connected)
5. Swap – Switch between two calls (availa-ble if up to three parties are connected).
SMS - Short Message Service
Reading SMS
1. Press MENU.
2. Scroll to Messages… and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Read and press ENTER.
4. Scroll to a message and press ENTER.> The message text is shown in the dis-
play. Additional selections can be madeby pressing ENTER. Hold EXIT
depressed to leave the menu system.
Writing and sending
1. Press MENU.
2. Scroll to Messages… and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Write new and press ENTER.
4. Enter text and press ENTER.
5. Scroll to Send and press ENTER.
6. Enter a phone number and press ENTER.
IMEI number
To block the phone, you must provide yournetwork operator with the phone's IMEI num-ber. This is a 15 digit serial number that is pro-grammed into the phone. Dial *#06# to showthis number in the display. Write it down andkeep it in a safe place.
Specifications
Output 2 W
SIM card Small
Memory entries 250A
SMS (Short Message Serv-ice)
Yes
Data/Fax No
Dualband (900/1800 MHz) Yes
A In the phone, plus the number of memory spaces that areavailable on the SIM card.
10 Infotainment system
Menu structure – phone*
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 273
Phone menu
1. Call register…
1.1. Last 10 missed calls
1.2. Last 10 received calls
1.3. Last 10 dialled calls
1.4. Erase list…
1.4.1. All calls
1.4.2. Missed calls
1.4.3. Received calls
1.4.4. Dialled numbers
1.5. Call duration…
1.5.1. Last call
1.5.2. Call count
1.5.3. Total time
1.5.4. Reset timers
2. Phone book…
2.1. Search
2.2. New contact
2.3. Copy all…
2.3.1. SIM to phone
2.3.2. Phone to SIM
2.4. Speed dial…
2.4.1. Active
2.4.2. Select numbers
2.5. Erase SIM
2.6. Erase phone
2.7. Memory status
3. Messages…
3.1. Read
3.2. Write new
3.3. Message settings…
3.3.1. SMSC number
3.3.2. Validity time…
3.3.3. Message type…
4 Call options…
4.1. Send my number
4.2. Call waiting
4.3. Automatic answer
4.4. Auto re-dial
4.5. Voice mail number
4.6. Diversions…
4.6.1. All calls
4.6.2. When busy
4.6.3. Not answered
4.6.4. Not reachable
4.6.5. Fax calls
4.6.6. Data calls
4.6.7. Cancel all
5. Change phone
5.1. Carphone
5.2. Add phone
5.3–7. Added phones1
NOTE
The menu above only applies to cars withBluetoothTM handsfree.
6. Phone settings…
6.1. Network selection…
6.1.1. Automatic
6.1.2. Manual select
6.2. SIM security…
6.2.1. On
6.2.2. Off
1 A maximum of 5 phones.
10 Infotainment system
Menu structure – phone*
10
274 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
6.2.3. Automatic
6.3. Edit PIN code
6.4. Sounds and volume…
6.4.1. Ring volume
6.4.2. Ring signals…
6.4.3. Mute radio
6.4.4. Message beep
6.5. IDIS
6.6. Reset phone settings
Description of menu options
1. Call register
1.1. Last 10 missed
List of missed calls. You can choose to call,erase or store the number in the phone book.
1.2. Last 10 received
List of received calls. You can choose to call,erase or store the number in the phone book.
1.3. Last 10 dialled
List of dialled numbers. You can choose to call,erase or store the number in the phone book.
1.4. Erase list
Erase the lists found in the menus 1.1, 1.2 and1.3 as below.
1.4.1. All calls
1.4.2. Missed calls
1.4.3. Received calls
1.4.4. Dialled numbers
1.5. Call duration
Duration of all calls or of the most recent call.To reset the call timer, see menu 1.5.4.
1.5.1. Last call
1.5.2. Call count
1.5.3. Total time
1.5.4. Reset timers
2. Phone book
2.1. Search
Search for a name in the phone book.
2.2. New contact
Store names and phone numbers in the phonebook, see page 270.
2.3. Copy all
Copy phone numbers and names from the SIMcard to the phone memory.
2.3.1. SIM to phone
2.3.2. Phone to SIM
2.4. Speed dial
A number stored in the phone book can bestored as a speed dial number.
2.4.1 Active
2.4.2 Select numbers
2.5. Erase SIM
Erase the entire SIM card memory.
2.6. Erase phone
Erase the entire phone memory.
2.7. Memory status
Shows how many positions are occupied in theSIM card and phone memory. The table showshow many of the total number of positions areoccupied, e.g. 100 (250).
3. Messages
3.1. Read
Received text messages. Select whether toerase, forward, change or save the entire mes-sage or parts of it.
3.2. Write new
Write a message using the keypad. Choosewhether to save or send it.
3.3. Message settings
Enter the number (SMSC number) of the mes-sage centre to which messages are to be trans-ferred as well as how long they are to be savedat the message centre. Contact your network
10 Infotainment system
Menu structure – phone*
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 275
operator for information on message settings.Normally, these settings should not be altered.
3.3.1. SMSC number
3.3.2. Validity time…
3.3.3. Message type…
4. Call settings
4.1. Send my number
Displays or hides your phone number to/fromthe person you call. Contact your networkoperator regarding ex-directory numbers.
4.2. Call waiting
Be alerted during a phone call that there isanother incoming call.
4.3. Auto answer
Automatically answers incoming calls.
4.4. Auto redial
Automatically calls a previously engaged num-ber.
4.5. Voice mail number
Stores voice mail number.
4.6. Call divert
Choose when and what type of calls are to bediverted to a specified phone number.
4.6.1. All calls
This setting only applies during the call in pro-gress.
4.6.2 When busy
4.6.3. Not answered
4.6.4. Not reachable
4.6.5. Fax calls
4.6.6. Data calls
4.6.7. Cancel all
5. Change phone
5.1. Car phone
Select the built-in phone.
5.2. Add phone
Add mobile phones to the list Added phones.
5.3-7. Added phones
Select to connect to one of the added phones(up to 5 phones).
NOTE
The menu above only applies to cars withBluetoothTM handsfree.
6. Phone settings
6.1. Selecting network
Choose a network automatically or manually.The selected network is shown in the display inthe phone's basic mode.
6.1.1. Automatic
6.1.2. Manual select
6.2. SIM security
Select if the PIN code should be on, off or if thephone should automatically give the PIN code.
6.2.1. On
6.2.2. Off
6.2.3. Automatic
6.3. Edit PIN code
Change PIN code. Write down and save thecode in a safe place.
6.4. Sounds and volume
6.4.1. Ring volume
Adjust the ring tone volume.
6.4.2. Ring signals…
There are seven different ring tones.
6.4.3. Mute radio
The radio can be switched off/on.
6.4.4. Message beep
6.5. IDIS
If the IDIS function is deactivated, incomingcalls are not delayed, regardless of the drivingsituation.
6.6. Reset phone settings
Reset the system's factory settings.
10 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
10
276 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
System overview.
Mobile phone
Microphone
Centre console
BluetoothTM
A mobile phone equipped with BluetoothTM
can be connected wirelessly to the audio sys-tem. The audio system then works handsfree,with the option to control a range of the mobilephone's functions remotely. The microphone isfitted in the roof console (2). The mobile phonecan always be operated by its own keys irre-spective of whether or not it is connected.
NOTE
Only a selection of mobile phones are fullycompatible with the handsfree function.Volvo recommends that you seek assis-tance from an authorised Volvo dealer orvisit www.volvocars.com for information oncompatible phones.
Menus and controls
The menus are navigated using the controlpanel in the centre console (3), see page 268.
Remember
The menus are controlled from the centre con-sole and the steering wheel keypad. For gen-eral information on menus, see page 273.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with bothBluetoothTM handsfree and built-in phonethen there is an additional menu in thephone menu, see page 273.
Activate/deactivate
A short press on PHONE activates the hands-free function. The text PHONE at the top of thedisplay shows that it is in phone mode. Thesymbol shows that the handsfree func-tion is active.
One long press on PHONE deactivates thehandsfree function and disconnects a con-nected phone.
Connect mobile phone
A mobile phone is connected in different waysdepending on whether or not it has been con-nected previously. To connect a mobile phonefor the first time, follow the instructions below:
Alternative 1 - via the car's menu system
1. Make the mobile phone detectable/visiblevia BluetoothTM, see the mobile phone'smanual or www.volvocars.com.
2. Activate the handsfree function withPHONE.> Menu option Add phone appears on
the display. If one or more mobilephones have already been registeredthen these are also shown.
3. Select Add phone.> The audio system searches for mobile
phones in the vicinity. The search takesapproximately 30 seconds. The mobilephones detected are specified with theirrespective BluetoothTM name in the dis-play. The handsfree function'sBluetoothTM name is shown in themobile phone as My Volvo Car.
10 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 277
4. Choose one of the mobile phones in theaudio system display.
5. Enter the number series shown in the audiosystem display via the mobile phone key-pad.
Alternative 2 - via the phone's menu system
1. Activate the handsfree function withPHONE. If there is a phone connected,disconnect the connected phone.
2. Search with the phone's BluetoothTM, seethe mobile phone's manual.
3. Select My Volvo Car in the list of unitsdetected in your mobile phone.
4. Enter the PIN code '1234' into the mobilephone when prompted for the PIN code.
5. Select to connect to My Volvo Car fromthe mobile phone.
The mobile phone is registered and connectedautomatically to the audio system while the textSynchronising is shown in the display. Formore information on how mobile phones areregistered, see page 278.
When the connection is established the symbol is shown and the mobile phone's
BluetoothTM name is shown in the display. Now
the mobile phone can be controlled from theaudio system.
To call
1. Make sure that the text PHONE is shownat the top of the display and that the symbol is visible.
2. Dial the number or use the phone book,see page 279.
3. Press ENTER.
The call is interrupted with EXIT.
Disconnecting the mobile phone
Automatic disconnection takes place if themobile phone moves out of the audio system'srange. For more information on connection,see page 278.
Manual disconnection takes place by deacti-vating the handsfree function with one longpress on PHONE. The handsfree function isalso deactivated when the engine is switchedoff or when a door is opened1.
When the mobile phone has been discon-nected an ongoing call can be continued withthe mobile phone's built-in microphone andspeaker.
NOTE
Some mobile phones require that thechangeover from handsfree is confirmedfrom the phone's keypad.
Making and receiving calls
Incoming call
Calls are accepted with ENTER even if theaudio system is in CD or FM mode for example.Refuse or end with EXIT.
Auto answer
The automatic answer function means thatcalls are accepted automatically. Activate/deactivate under Phone Menu… Call
options… Automatic answer.
In-call menu
Press MENU or ENTER during an ongoing callto access the following functions:
• Mute microphone - audio system micro-phone is muted.
• Transfer call to mobile - the call is trans-ferred to the mobile phone.
1 Applies to Keyless Drive.
10 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
10
278 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
NOTE
With certain mobile phones the connectionis terminated when the privacy function isused. This is normal. The handsfree functionasks if you want to reconnect.
• Phone book – searching in the phonebook.
NOTE
A new call cannot be started during anongoing call.
Audio settings
Call volume
Call volume can be adjusted during calls. Usethe steering wheel keypad.
Audio system volume
In phone mode (PHONE) the audio system vol-ume can be adjusted as usual with VOLUME.
The audio source can be automatically mutedfor incoming calls under Phone Menu…
Phone settings… Sounds and volume…
Mute radio.
Ring volume
Go to Phone Menu… Phone settings…
Sounds and volume… Ring volume
and adjust with / on the navigation but-ton.
Ring signals
The handsfree function has integrated ring sig-nals that can be selected under Phone
Menu… Phone settings… Sounds and
volume… Ring signals… Ring signal 1
etc.
NOTE
The connected mobile phone's ring signal isnot deactivated when one of the handsfreesystem's integrated signals is used.
In order to select the connected phone's ringsignal2, go to Phone Menu… Phone
settings… Sounds and volume… Ring
signals… Use mobile phone signal.
More on registering and connecting
A maximum of three mobile phones can beregistered. Registration is performed once perphone. After registration the mobile phone is inthe list of added phones. Not more than onemobile phone can be connected at a time.Phones can be deregistered under Phone
Menu… Bluetooth… Remove phone.
Automatic connection
When the handsfree function is active and thelast mobile phone connected is in range it isconnected automatically. When the audio sys-tem searches for the last phone connected itsname is shown in the display. To change overto manual connection of another phone, pressEXIT.
Manual connection
If you want to connect a mobile phone otherthan the last connected or change the con-nected mobile phone, proceed as follows:
Set the audio system in phone mode(PHONE) and follow the instructions on thedisplay or change the connected mobile phoneby using the menu system as described below.
The menu structure is available in two variantsdepending on whether the car only has
2 Not supported by all mobile phones.
10 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 279
BluetoothTM or if the car also has a built-inphone.
• For cars with only BluetoothTM the connec-tion is made under Phone Menu…
Bluetooth… Change phone Add
phone or select one of the previously con-nected phones.
• For cars with built-in phone andBluetoothTM the connection is made underPhone Menu… Change phone Add
phone or select one of the previously con-nected phones.
Phonebook
All use of the phone book presupposes that thetext PHONE is shown at the top of the displayand that the symbol is visible.
The audio system stores a copy of the phonebook from each registered mobile phone. Thephone book is copied automatically to theaudio system during each connection. Deacti-vate the function under Phone settings…
Synchronise phone book. Searching for con-tacts is only performed in the connectedmobile phone's phone book.
NOTE
If the mobile phone does not support copy-ing of the phone book then List is empty isshown when copying is finished.
If the phone book contains a ringing caller'scontact information then this is shown in thedisplay.
Searching for contacts
The easiest way to search in the phone book iswith long presses on the keys 2–9. This startsa search in the phone book based on the key'sfirst letter.
The phone book can also be reached with / on the navigation button or with / on
the steering wheel keypad. The search can alsobe performed from the phone book's Searchmenu under Phone book… Search:
1. Enter the first few letters of the contact andpress ENTER. Or simply press ENTER.
2. Scroll to a contact and press ENTER tocall.
Voice recognition
The mobile phone's voice recognition functionfor dialling can be used by holding in ENTER.
NOTE
Only a selection of mobile phones are fullycompatible with the voice recognition func-tion. Volvo recommends that you contact anauthorised Volvo dealer or visitwww.volvocars.com for information oncompatible phones.
Voice mail number
The number to the voice mail is changed underCall options… Voice mail number. If nonumber is stored then this menu is reachedwith one long press on 1. Press 1 for a long timeto use the stored number.
Call lists
The call lists are copied to the handsfree func-tion at each new connection and are thenupdated during the connection. Press ENTER
to show the last dialled. Other call lists areavailable under Call register….
NOTE
Certain mobile phones show a list of the lastdialled numbers in reverse order.
Inputting text
Input text using the keypad in the centre con-sole. Press once for the key's first character,
10 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
10
280 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
twice for the second etc. Continue pressing formore characters, see the table on page 270.
A short press on EXIT deletes an input char-acter. One long press on EXIT clears all inputcharacters. / on the navigation buttonscrolls between the characters.
Menu structure - BluetoothTM
handsfree
NOTE
The menu for BluetoothTM handsfree isavailable in two variants. For cars with onlyBluetoothTM handsfree and for cars withbuilt-in phone and BluetoothTM handsfree.
1. Call register…
1.1. Last 10 missed calls
1.2. Last 10 received calls
1.3. Last 10 dialled calls
2. Phone book…
2.1. Search
2.2. Copy fr. mobile phone
3. Bluetooth…
3.1. Change phone
3.1.1. Add phone
3.1.2–6.Added phones3
3.2. Remove phone
3.3. Connect fr. mobile phone
3.4. Car Bluetooth info
4. Call options…
4.1. Automatic answer
4.2. Voice mail number
5. Phone settings…
5.1. Sounds and volume…
5.1.1. Ring volume
5.1.2. Ring signals…
5.1.3. Mute radio
5.2. Synchronise phone book
Menu structure - BluetoothTM
handsfree with built-in phone
1. Call register…
1.1. Last 10 missed calls
1.2. Last 10 received calls
1.3. Last 10 dialled calls
2. Phone book…
2.1. Search
2.2. Copy fr. mobile phone
3. Bluetooth…
3.1. Remove phone
3.2. Connect fr. mobile phone
3.3. Car Bluetooth info
4. Call options…
4.1. Automatic answer
4.2. Voice mail number
5. Change phone
5.1. Carphone
5.2. Add phone
5.3–7. Added phones3
3 A maximum of 5 phones.
10 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 281
6. Phone settings…
6.1. Sounds and volume…
6.1.1. Ring volume
6.1.2. Ring signals…
6.1.3. Mute radio
6.2. Synchronise phone book
282
Type designation................................................................................... 284Dimensions and weights....................................................................... 286Engine specifications............................................................................ 289Engine oil............................................................................................... 290Fluids and lubricants............................................................................. 292Fuel....................................................................................................... 295Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure ......................................... 298Electrical system................................................................................... 300Type approval....................................................................................... 302Symbols in the display.......................................................................... 303
SPECIF ICATIONS
11 Specifications
Type designation
11
284
11 Specifications
Type designation
11
285
Knowing the car's type designation, vehicleidentification and engine numbers can facili-tate all contact with a Volvo dealer regardingthe car and when ordering spare parts andaccessories.
Type designation, vehicle identificationnumber, maximum permissible weights,codes for colour and upholstery and typeapproval number.S40 and V50: The label is visible when theright rear door is opened. C30 and C70:The label is visible when the right door isopened.
Label for parking heater.
Engine code, component and serial num-bers.
Label for engine oil.
Gearbox type designation and serial num-ber:
manual gearbox
, automatic gearbox
The car's identification number (VIN –Vehicle Identification Number).
Further information on the car is presented inthe registration document.
NOTE
The labels shown in the owner's manual arenot provided as exact reproductions ofthose in the car. The purpose is to showtheir approximate appearance and locationin the car. The information that applies toyour car in particular is available on the labelin question in your car.
11 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
11
286
Dimensions
Dimensions mm
A Wheelbase 2640
B Length 4266
C Load length, floor,folded seat
1486
D Load length, floor 663
E Load height 642
F Height 1447
Dimensions mm
G Front track 1548A
1535B
H Rear track 1544A
1531B
I Load width, floor 713
J Width 1782 (1797C)
Dimensions mm
K Width including doormirrors
2039
L Width including folded-in door mirrors
1871
A with 15" wheelB with 16" and 17" wheelsC with Keyless drive*
11 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
11
287
Weights
Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank90% full and all fluids.
The weight of passengers and accessories,and towball load (when a trailer is hitched, seetable) influences the payload and is notincluded in the kerb weight.
Permitted maximum load = Gross vehicleweight - Kerb weight.
NOTE
The documented kerb weight applies tocars in the standard version - i.e. a car with-out extra equipment or accessories. Thismeans that for every accessory added theloading capacity of the car is reduced cor-respondingly by the weight of the acces-sory.
Examples of accessories that reduce load-ing capacity are the Kinetic/Momentum/Summum equipment levels, as well as otheraccessories such as Towbar, Load carriers,Space box, Audio system, Auxiliary lamps,GPS, Fuel-driven heater, Safety grille, Car-pets, Cargo cover, Power seats, etc.
Weighing the car is a certain way of ascer-taining the kerb weight of your own partic-ular car.
WARNING
The car's driving characteristics changedepending on how heavily it is loaded andhow the load is distributed.
For decal location, see page 284.
Max. total weight
Max. train weight (car+trailer)
Max. front axle load
Max. rear axle load
Equipment level
Max. load: See registration document.
Max. roof load: 75 kg.
11 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
11
288
Towing capacity and towball load
Engine Maximum weight, braked trailer (kg) Maximum towball load (kg)
1.6 1200 50
DRIVe 1300 75
D2 1300 75
2.0F 1350 75
2.0 1350 75
others 1500 75
Engine Maximum weight, unbraked trailer (kg) Maximum towball load (kg)
1.6 600 50
2.0, D2 and DRIVe 650 50
others 700 50
11 Specifications
Engine specifications
11
289
Overview
NOTE
Not all engines are available in all markets.
Engine Engine
codeA
Output(kW/rpm)
Output(hp/rpm)
Torque (Nm/rpm)
No. ofcylinders
Bore(mm)
Stroke(mm)
Sweptvolume(litres)
Com-pression
ratio
1.6 B4164S3 74/6000 100/6000 150/4000 4 79 81.4 1.596 11.0:1
2.0F B4204S4 107/6000 145/6000 185/4500 4 87.5 83.1 1.999 10.8:1
2.0 B4204S3 107/6000 145/6000 185/4500 4 87.5 83.1 1.999 10.8:1
T5 B5254T7 169/5000 230/5000 320/1500 – 5000 5 83 93.2 2.521 9.0:1
DRIVe D4162T 84/3600 115/3600 270/1750-2500 4 75 88.3 1.560 16.0:1
D2 D4162T 84/3600 115/3600 270/1750-2500 4 75 88.3 1.560 16.0:1
D3 D5204T5 110/3500 150/3500 350/1500-2750 5 81 77 1.984 16.5:1
D4 D5204T 130/3500 177/3500 400/1750-2750 5 81 77 1.984 16.5:1
A Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine, see page 284.
11 Specifications
Engine oil
11
290
Adverse driving conditions
Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnor-mally high oil temperature or oil consumption.Below are some examples of adverse drivingconditions.
Check the oil level more frequently for longjourneys:
• towing a caravan or trailer
• in mountainous regions
• at high speeds
• in temperatures colder than -30 °C or hot-ter than +40 °C
The above also apply to shorter driving dis-tances at low temperatures.
Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adversedriving conditions. It provides extra protectionfor the engine.
Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for theengine's service intervals all engines arefilled with a specially adapted syntheticengine oil at the factory. The choice of oilhas been made very carefully with regard toservice life, starting characteristics, fuelconsumption and environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used inorder that the recommended service inter-vals can be applied. Only use a prescribedgrade of oil for both filling and oil change,otherwise you will risk affecting service life,starting characteristics, fuel consumptionand environmental impact.
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war-ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribedgrade and viscosity is not used.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are car-ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
11 Specifications
Engine oil
11
291
Engine oil grade
Engine Engine code Recommended oil grade Volume, incl. oil filter
(litres)
1.6 B4164S3 Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5
Viscosity: SAE 5W–30
approx. 4.0
2.0F B4204S4 approx. 4.3
2.0 B4204S3 approx. 4.3
DRIVe D4162T approx. 3.8
D2 D4162T approx. 3.8
D4 D5204T Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5
Viscosity: SAE 0W–30
approx. 5.9
D3 D5204T5 approx. 5.9
T5 B5254T7 approx. 5.8
For filling engine oil, see page 222.
11 Specifications
Fluids and lubricants
11
292
Overview
IMPORTANT
The recommended transmission fluid mustbe used to prevent damage to the gearbox.Do not mix with any other transmission fluid.If the transmission is topped up with a dif-ferent fluid, contact a workshop nearby forservicing. Volvo recommends that you con-tact an authorised Volvo workshop.
Gearbox oil
Manual gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid
IB5 2.1 BOT 130 M
B6 1.6
BOT 350M3MTX75 1.8
M66 1.9
Automatic gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid
MPS6 7.3 BOT 341
AW55-51 7.7 JWS 3309
TF-80SC 7.0 AW1
11 Specifications
Fluids and lubricants
11
��
293
Fluids
Fluid System Volume(litres)
Recommended oil grade
Coolant 1.6 5.8 Coolant recommended by Volvo mixed with 50% waterA, see the packaging. The thermostatstarts opening at:
petrol engine (1.6) 82 °C
petrol engines 90 °C
diesel engines 82 °C
diesel engine (D2) 83 °C
2.0 and 2.0F 6.5
T5, manual gear-box
7.0
T5, automaticgearbox
7.5
D2 and DRIVe 6.2
D3 and D4 8.5
Refrigerant Air conditioning B R134a (HFC134a)
Oil: PAG
Brake fluid Brake system 0.6 DOT 4+
Powersteeringfluid
Power steering 0.8 – 0.9 WSS M2C204-A2 or equivalent product with same specifications.
Washer fluid 4-cyl. Petrol/Die-sel
4.0 Washer fluid recommended by Volvo - with frost protection during cold weather and belowfreezing point.
5-cyl. Petrol/Die-sel
6.5
11 Specifications
Fluids and lubricants
11
294
Fluid System Volume(litres)
Recommended oil grade
Fuel Petrol: 1.6, 2.0,2.0F
approx. 55 Petrol: see page 145
Petrol: T5 approx. 62
Diesel: D2 andDRIVe
approx. 52 Diesel: see page 146
Diesel: D3 andD4
approx. 60
A Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1.B Refrigerant quantity varies depending on engine variant. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop for the correct information.
11 Specifications
Fuel
11
��
295
CO2 emissions and fuel consumption
A B C
2.0F 254 (242A) 10.9 (14.8A) 137 (135A) 5.9 (8.2A) 180 (174A) 7.7 (10.6A)
2.0 252 10.8 134 5.8 177 7.6
T5 294 12.6 150 6.4 203 8.7
T5 315 13.5 151 6.5 211 9.0
DRIVe 112 4.3 92 3.5 99 3.8
D2 137 5.2 101 3.8 114 4.3
D3 183 7.0 106 4.0 134 5.1
D3 210 7.9 122 4.6 154 5.8
11 Specifications
Fuel
11
296
A B C
D4 183 7.0 106 4.0 134 5.1
D4 210 7.9 122 4.6 154 5.8
A E85
: gram/km
: litre/100 km
A = urban driving
B = extra-urban driving
C = combined driving
Fuel consumption and emissions of
carbon dioxide
Fuel consumption and emission values in thetable above are based on specific EU cycles1,that apply to cars with kerb weight in the basicversion and without extra equipment. The car'sweight may increase depending on equipment.
This, as well as how heavily the car is loaded,increases fuel consumption and carbon diox-ide emissions.
There are several reasons for increased fuelconsumption compared with the table's val-ues. Examples of this are:
• The driver's driving style.
• If the customer has specified wheels largerthan those fitted as standard on the mod-el's basic version, then resistance increa-ses.
• High speed results in increased wind resis-tance.
• Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions,weather and the condition of the car.
Even a combination of the above-mentionedexamples can result in significantly improvedconsumption. For further information, pleaserefer to the regulations referred to.
Large deviations in fuel consumption may arisein a comparison with the EU driving cycleswhich are used in the certification of the carand on which the consumption figures in thetable are based.
To bear in mind
Tips that the driver can use in order to reduceconsumption:
1 Official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment ("EU driving cycles") all in accordance with EU Directive 80/1268/EEC (Euro 4), EU Regulationno 692/2008 (Euro 5) and UN ECE Regulation no 101. The regulations cover the driving cycles for urban driving and extra-urban driving. - Urban driving - the measurement starts with cold startingthe engine. The driving is simulated. - Extra-urban driving - the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0-120 km/h. The driving is simulated. - A car with a D2 engine and 6-speed manualtransmission with Start/Stop is started in 2nd gear. - The value for combined driving, which is given in the table, according to legislation, is a combination of urban driving and extra-urban driving.CO2 emission - to calculate the carbon dioxide emissions from the two driving cycles, the exhaust gases are collected. These are then analysed and give the value for CO2 emissions.
11 Specifications
Fuel
11
297
• Drive gently and avoid unnecessary accel-eration as well as braking too hard.
• Drive with the correct air pressure in thetyres and check this regularly - select ECOtyre pressure for best results, see the tyrepressure table on page 298.
• Choice of tyres can affect fuel consump-tion - seek advice on suitable tyres from adealer.
See further information and more advice onpages 13 and 142.
See page 144 for general information on fuel.
11 Specifications
Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure
11
298
Approved tyre pressures
Engine Tyre size Speed (km/h) Load, 1 - 3 persons Max. load
Front (kPa)A Rear (kPa) Front (kPa) Rear (kPa) ECO pressureB
D2
DRIVe
195/65 R150–160 230 210 270 270 270
160+ 250 210 280 260 -
205/55 R160–160 230 210 250 250 250
160+ 250 210 280 260 -
205/50 R170–160 240 220 250 250 250
160+ 260 220 280 260 -
1.6
2.0
2.0F
195/65 R15
205/55 R16
0–160 230 210 250 250 250
160+ 250 210 280 260 -
205/50 R17
215/45 R18C
0–160 240 220 250 250 250
160+ 260 220 280 260 -
11 Specifications
Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure
11
299
Engine Tyre size Speed (km/h) Load, 1 - 3 persons Max. load
Front (kPa)A Rear (kPa) Front (kPa) Rear (kPa) ECO pressureB
T5
D3
D4
205/55 R160–160 230 210 250 250 250
160+ 260 210 280 260 -
205/50 R17
215/45 R18
0–160 240 220 250 250 250
160+ 270 220 290 270 -
Temporary Spare Tyre 0–80 420 420 420 420 -
A In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa.B Economical driving, see page 198C The 1.6 cannot be specified with this tyre.
NOTE
All engines, tyres or combinations of theseare not always available in all markets.
11 Specifications
Electrical system
11
300
General
The car has a voltage-regulated AC alternator.The electrical system is single-pole and usesthe chassis and engine casing as a conductor.
The battery capacity is dependent upon theequipment level in the vehicle. If the starterbattery is replaced, therefore, you must ensurethat you switch to a battery with the same
capacity as the original battery (see the labelon the battery).
Battery
Voltage (V) Cold start capacity,
CCA - Cold Cranking Amperes (A)
Reserve capacity
(minutes)
Capacity (Ah)
12590 100 60
760 A 120 70
12 700 B 135 80
A Cars equipped with High Performance audio system.B Cars equipped with diesel, keyless drive, Premium Sound audio system, fuel-driven heater or RTI.
Bulbs
Lighting Output (W) Type
Dipped beam, halogen 55 H7 LL
Main beam, halogen 65 H9
Extra main beam, ABL 55 H7 LL
Front direction indicators 24 PY24W SV
Position/parking lamps, front 5 W5W LL BV
11 Specifications
Electrical system
11
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 301
Lighting Output (W) Type
Side marker lamps, front 5 WY5W LL
Fog lamps 35 H8
Side direction indicators, door mirrors 5 WY5W LL
Front courtesy lighting 3 T10 Socket W2.1x9.5d
Glovebox lighting 3 T10 Socket W2.1x9.5d
Vanity mirror lighting* 1.2 Socket SV5.5 Length 35 mm
Cargo area lighting 5 Socket SV8.5 Length 38 mm
Number plate lighting 5 C5W LL
Rear direction indicators 21 PY21W LL
Position lamps, rear 4 P21/4W LL
Brake light 21 P21W LL
Reversing lamp 21 P21W LL
Rear fog lamp 21 P21/4W LL
11 Specifications
Type approval
11
302
Remote control key system
Country andregion
A, B, CY, CZ, D, DK,E, EST, F, FIN, GB,GR, H, I, IRL, L, LT,LV, M, NL, P, PL, S,SK, SLO
Delphi herebycertifies that thisremote control keysystem conforms tothe essential char-acteristic require-ments and other rel-evant regulations ofdirective 1999/5/EC.
IS, LI, N, CH
HR
ROK Delphi 2003-07-15,Germany R-LPD1-03-0151
BR
TW
ETC093LPD0155
Certification of the Keyless Drivesystem
Siemens VDO Automotive A.G. hereby certifiesthat this equipment type 5WK4 8952,5WK48956, 5WK48812 conforms to theessential characteristic requirements and otherrelevant regulations of Directive 1999/5/EC.
11 Specifications
Symbols in the display
11
��
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 303
General
There are a variety of different symbols in thedisplay in the car. The symbols are divided intowarning, indicator and information symbols.Shown below are the most common symbolswith their meanings and a reference to wherein the manual further information can be found.For more information on symbols and textmessages, see pages 50 and 54.
- Red warning symbol, illuminates whena fault has been indicated which could affectthe safety and/or driveability of the car. Anexplanatory text is shown on the informationdisplay at the same time.
- Yellow information symbol, illuminatesin combination with text in the information dis-play, when a deviation in any of the car's sys-tems has occurred. The yellow symbol infor-mation can also illuminate in combination withother symbols.
Symbols in the display
Indicator and warning symbols in the
combined instrument panel
Symbol Meaning Page
Warning 19, 30, 50, 53,161
Information 50, 53, 161,170, 172
Emissionssystem
50, 51
Fault in theABS system
51, 52
Rear fog lamp 51
Symbol Meaning Page
Stability sys-tem, DSTC*
51, 169, 170
Engine pre-heater (diesel)
51
Low level infuel tank
51
Indicatorsymbol fortrailer
52
Parking brakeapplied
52
Airbags - SRS 19, 52
11 Specifications
Symbols in the display
11
304 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Symbol Meaning Page
Low oil pres-sure
50, 52
Seatbeltreminder
16, 52
Alternator notcharging
52
Fault in brakesystem
52, 167
Main beamindicator
49
Symbol Meaning Page
Left directionindicators
49
Right direc-tion indicators
49
Other information symbols in the
combined instrument panel
Symbol Meaning Page
Rain sensor* 66
Cruise control* 68
Gear shift indicator* 157
Information symbols in the centre
console display
Symbol Meaning Page
G021216
Surround sound (onlyPremium Sound)
255
G021221
News 259
G021222
Programme types 259
G021223
Regional radio pro-grammes
260
Audio files 262
Directory in CD disc 262
G021220
Traffic information 259
Phone* 276
BluetoothTM hands-free*
276
11 Specifications
Symbols in the display
11
305
Information symbols in the roof console
display
Symbol Meaning Page
Seatbelt reminder 17
Airbag, passengerseat, activated
22, 23
Airbag, passengerseat, deactivated
23
12 Alphabetical Index
12
306
A
A/Celectronic climate control..................... 97manual climate control................... 92, 93
ABS fault............................................ 51, 167
Active Bending Lights (ABL)...................... 59
Active headlamps...................................... 59
Adaptation............................................... 155
Additional heater (Diesel)......................... 102
Adjusting headlamp pattern.................... 190halogen headlamp.............................. 190
AF – automatic frequency update........... 260
Airbag........................................................ 20activating/deactivating, PACOS........... 22driver's and front passenger side......... 21key switch off........................................ 22
AIRBAG ..................................................... 20
Airbag system............................................ 20
Air conditioning.......................................... 92ECC...................................................... 95general.................................................. 90
Air distribution............................................ 98ECC...................................................... 96
Air distribution, A/C................................... 93
Air quality system, ECC............................. 96
Air vents..................................................... 91
Alarm........................................................ 137alarm indicator.................................... 137alarm signals....................................... 138arming................................................. 137automatic alarm activation................. 138deactivating a triggered alarm............ 138disarming............................................ 137RDS traffic warning............................. 259reduced alarm level............................ 138testing the alarm system.................... 138
Alcolock................................................... 148
Antenna location, Keyless drive............... 132
Approach light, duration.................... 77, 126setting................................................... 82
Armrest in the rear seat .......................... 119
Audio, see also Sound............................. 252
Audio volumephone.......................................... 270, 278phone/media player............................ 278programme types............................... 261ring signal, phone............................... 278
Autoclimate control settings........................ 95
AUTOstoring stations................................... 257
Auto climate............................................... 95
Automatic car washes............................. 210
Automatic gearboxmanual gear positions (Geartronic)..... 158towing and recovery........................... 176trailer........................................... 181, 182
Automatic locking.................................... 135
Automatic relocking................................. 134
Autostart.................................................. 152
Auto volume control................................ 255
Auxiliary heater........................................ 102
Average fuel consumption......................... 63
B
Backrest rear seat, lowering.................... 118
Bass speaker........................................... 254
Battery............................................. 230, 300changing the battery in the remote con-trol key................................................ 133maintenance............................... 219, 230overload.............................................. 143
12 Alphabetical Index
12
307
specifications...................................... 300start assistance................................... 180symbols on the battery....................... 230warning symbols................................. 230
Bioethanol E85........................................ 145
Blind spot (BLIS)...................................... 173
Blind Spot Information System, BLIS 78, 173
Bluetoothhandsfree............................................ 276mute microphone............................... 277transfer call to mobile......................... 277
Bluetoothmedia.................................................. 254streaming audio.................................. 254
Boardingrear seat.............................................. 107
Bonnet, opening...................................... 220
Brake and clutch fluid.............................. 226
Brake light.................................................. 61
Brakesanti-lock braking system, ABS........... 167brake light............................................. 61Emergency Brake Assistance, EBA ... 168emergency brake lights...................... 168handbrake............................................. 72
Brake system........................................... 167
Bulb holderremoval............................................... 237
Bulbschanging............................................. 234
Bulbs, see Lighting.......................... 234, 300
C
Callsfunctions during a call................ 269, 272incoming............................................. 277operation..................................... 269, 277volume in phone................................. 270
Car care................................................... 210
Car care, leather upholstery.................... 212
Cargo area............................................... 120cargo cover......................................... 120lighting................................................ 111loading................................................ 189safety net............................................ 122
Cargo cover............................................. 120
Car settings............................................... 82
Car upholstery......................................... 211
Car wash.................................................. 210
Catalytic converter................................... 145recovery.............................................. 176
CD discsstorage compartment......................... 116
CD functions............................................ 262
Checking and topping up the coolant..... 225
Checking the engine oil level................... 222
Checksfluids and oils...................................... 222
Children..................................................... 31child seats and side airbags................. 24location in the car................................. 31location in the car, table....................... 32safety.................................................... 31
Child seat................................................... 31
Child seats................................................. 31ISOFIX fixture system for child seats. . . 37size classes for child seats with the ISO-FIX fixture system................................. 37upper mounting points for child seats.. 40
Cigarette lighter socketfront seat............................................... 56
Cleaningautomatic car washes......................... 210car wash............................................. 210rims..................................................... 210
12 Alphabetical Index
12
308
seatbelts............................................. 213upholstery........................................... 211
Climate controlgeneral.................................................. 90personal preferences............................ 81
Climate control settingsauto....................................................... 95
Clock, adjustment...................................... 81
Clutch fluid, checking & topping up........ 226
Coat hanger............................................. 115
Cold start................................................. 160automatic gearbox.............................. 160
Collisioncrash mode........................................... 30inflatable curtain, IC.............................. 26
Colour code, paint................................... 214
Combined instrument panel...................... 49
Compass................................................... 75calibration............................................. 75setting the zone.................................... 75
Condensation in headlamps.................... 210
Coolant.................................................... 225
Cooling system........................................ 142
Crash, see Collision................................... 30
Cruise control............................................ 68
D
Deadlockdeactivation........................................ 135temporary deactivation....................... 135
Deadlocks................................................ 135
Defroster.................................................... 93
Diesel....................................................... 146
Diesel: engine preheater............................ 51
Diesel particle filter.................................. 146
Dipstick, electronic.................................. 224
Direction indicators.................................... 62
Disc text................................................... 263
Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor... 160
Display, messages..................................... 54
Display lighting.......................................... 59
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II............ 251, 255
Door mirrors............................................... 77
Driver's door control panel.................. 48, 73
Drivingcooling system.................................... 142economical......................................... 142in water............................................... 142slippery driving conditions.................. 143with trailer........................................... 181
Driving in water........................................ 142
Driving with a trailertowball load........................................ 287towing capacity.................................. 287
DSTC, see also Stability control system.. 169
DSTC, see also Stability systemsymbol.................................................. 51
During a call, functions............................ 272
E
ECC, electronic climate control................. 91
Economical driving.................................. 142
ECO pressure.......................................... 198table............................................ 198, 298
Eco Start/Stop DRIVe.............................. 163
Electrical socketcentre console...................................... 56rear seat................................................ 56
12 Alphabetical Index
12
309
Electrical system...................................... 300
Emergency calls...................................... 267
Emergency equipmentwarning triangle.................................. 199
Emergency puncture repair..................... 203
Emission controlfault indicator........................................ 51
Engine block heater................................. 154fuel-driven............................................. 99
Engine compartment............................... 220coolant................................................ 225oil........................................................ 222power steering fluid............................ 227
Engine oil......................................... 222, 290adverse driving conditions.................. 290capacities........................................... 290filter..................................................... 222oil grade.............................................. 290oil pressure........................................... 52
Engine specifications............................... 289
Entry, keyless............................................. 82
Environmental labelling, FSC, owner'smanual....................................................... 13
EON - Enhanced Other Networks............ 261
Equalizer.................................................. 255
Error messages in BLIS........................... 174
Expectant mothers, seatbelt...................... 17
External dimensions................................ 286
Extra mats................................................ 110
F
FanA/C........................................................ 92ECC...................................................... 95
Fast-wind................................................. 263
First aid equipment.................................. 200
Flexifuel.................................................... 154adaptation........................................... 155
Floor hatch............................................... 121
Floor mats................................................ 110
Fluids, capacities..................................... 292
Fluids and oils.................................. 222, 292
Fluids and oils, checks, engine compart-ment......................................................... 222
Fluids and oils general............................. 222
Fog lampsrear........................................................ 59
Fog lamps, on/off...................................... 59
Fold down the rear seat backrest ........... 118
Frequency update, automatic.................. 260
Front seats, heated.................................... 93
FSC, environmental labelling..................... 13
FuelCO2 emissions.................................... 295consumption....................................... 295fuel consumption, display..................... 63fuel economy...................................... 198fuel filter.............................................. 146level indicator........................................ 51parking heater....................................... 99refuelling............................................. 144
Fuses....................................................... 240box in the engine compartment.......... 241changing............................................. 240general................................................ 240relay/fuse box in the passenger com-partment............................................. 245
G
Gearboxmanual................................................ 157
Gear selector inhibitor............................. 159
12 Alphabetical Index
12
310
Geartronic................................................ 158
General information on fuel..................... 144
Glovebox................................................. 115locking................................................ 128
Gross vehicle weight............................... 287
GSI - Gear selector assistance........ 157, 164
H
Handbrake................................................. 72
Hazard warning flashers............................ 71
Headlamp pattern adjustment Active Bending Lights (ABL) .............. 190
Headlamps................................................. 58
Head restraint.......................................... 118
Heatingfront seats....................................... 93, 97rearview and door mirrors.............. 93, 97rear window.................................... 93, 97
High-pressure headlamp washing............. 65
HomeLink ................................................ 84
Home safe lighting............................... 62, 77setting................................................... 82
I
IDIS – Intelligent Driver Information Sys-tem........................................................... 267
Ignition keys............................................. 153
IMEI number............................................ 272
Immobiliser...................................... 126, 153
Inflatable Curtain........................................ 26
Information display.................................... 54
Information on fuel................................... 144
Infotainment systemmenus................................................. 250
Inlaid mats............................................... 110
Instrument lighting..................................... 59
Instrument overviewleft-hand drive....................................... 44right-hand drive.................................... 46
Interior lighting, see Lighting................... 111
Interior rearview mirror............................... 75automatic dimming............................... 75
Intermittent wiping..................................... 65
iPod , connection................................... 252
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats......... 37
J
Jack......................................................... 199
K
Kerb weight.............................................. 287
Keykeyless lock and ignition system........ 130remote control key.............................. 126
Key blade......................................... 127, 131active locks......................................... 129
Keyless drive............................ 130, 156, 302starting the car.................................... 156
Keyless entry............................................. 82
Keyless start (keyless drive)..................... 130
Keypad in the steering wheel...... 68, 70, 268
Key positions........................................... 152
Kick-downautomatic gearbox.............................. 159
12 Alphabetical Index
12
311
L
Lambda-sond.......................................... 145
Leather upholstery, washing instructions 212
LightingActive Xenon headlamps...................... 59approach light, duration............... 77, 126automatic lighting............................... 112automatic lighting, dipped beam.......... 58bulbs, specifications........................... 300cargo area........................................... 111dipped beam........................................ 58display lighting...................................... 59front fog lamps..................................... 59headlamp levelling................................ 58home safe lighting.......................... 62, 77in passenger compartment................. 111lighting panel, passenger compart-ment...................................................... 58main/dipped beam......................... 58, 62position/parking lamps......................... 58reading lamps..................................... 111rear fog lamp........................................ 59
Lighting, bulb replacement...................... 234bulb holder, rear................................. 238cargo area........................................... 238dipped beam...................................... 235
direction indicators............................. 236fog lamp.............................................. 237front.................................................... 234main beam.......................................... 235number plate lighting.......................... 238parking lamps..................................... 236passenger compartment lighting incargo area........................................... 239position lamps.................................... 236side marker lamps.............................. 236vanity mirror........................................ 239
Loadinggeneral................................................ 189load capacity...................................... 189load retaining eyelets.......................... 122
Load retaining eyelets.............................. 122
Locking.................................................... 131unlocking............................................ 134
Locking/unlocking................................... 134inside.................................................. 134outside................................................ 134
Lockslocking................................................ 134
Lubricants................................................ 292
Lubricants, capacities.............................. 292
M
Main/dipped beam, see Lightning............. 58
Main beamflashing................................................. 62
Main beam "flash"..................................... 62
Maintenance............................................ 219rustproofing........................................ 215self-maintenance................................ 219
Making calls..................................... 269, 277
Manual gearbox....................................... 157GSI - Gear selector assistance... 157, 164towing and recovery........................... 176
Manual gear positions (Geartronic).......... 158
Max. roof load ......................................... 287
Memory function in seats........................ 107
Menusaudio system...................................... 250
Menu structure.......................................... 81media player....................................... 265phone, menu options.......................... 274phone, overview................................. 273
Messages in BLIS.................................... 174
Messages in the information display......... 54
12 Alphabetical Index
12
312
Meters in the combined instrument panelfuel gauge............................................. 49outside temperature gauge.................. 49speedometer......................................... 49tachometer........................................... 49trip meter.............................................. 49
Mistingattending to the windows..................... 90condensation in headlamps............... 210rear window.......................................... 93removing with defroster function.... 93, 96timer function.................................. 93, 96
Mobile phoneconnect............................................... 278handsfree............................................ 276register phone..................................... 276
Mounting points (child seat)...................... 40
N
News........................................................ 259
O
Oil, see also Engine oil..................... 222, 290
Oil level low.............................................. 222
One-key dial............................................. 271
Owner's manual, environmental labelling.. 13
Oxyhydrogen gas.................................... 180
P
PACOS....................................................... 22
PACOS, switch.......................................... 22
Paintworkcolour code......................................... 214damage and touch-up........................ 214
Parking assistance................................... 171parking assistance sensors................ 172
Parking brake....................................... 52, 72
Parking heaterbattery and fuel..................................... 99general.................................................. 99parking on a hill.................................... 99symbols and display messages.......... 100time setting......................................... 101
Passenger compartment filter................... 90
Passenger compartment heaterfuel-driven............................................. 99
Personal preferences................................. 81approach light, duration....................... 82auto blower adjust................................ 81automatic locking................................. 82doors unlock......................................... 82home safe lighting................................ 82keyless entry......................................... 82lock confirm. light................................. 82recirculation timer................................. 81unlock confirm. light............................. 82
Petrol grade............................................. 145
Phonecalling from the phone book............... 271connect............................................... 278controls............................................... 268entering text........................................ 270handsfree............................................ 276incoming calls..................................... 277making calls........................................ 277on/off.................................................. 269one-key dial........................................ 271phone book......................................... 279phone book, shortcut......................... 279receiving a call.................................... 277register phone..................................... 276
12 Alphabetical Index
12
313
standby, standby mode...................... 269traffic safety........................................ 268
Phone bookhandling numbers............................... 270
Phone system.......................................... 267
Pinch protection, sunroof.......................... 80
Polishing.................................................. 211
Power seat............................................... 106
Powershift gearbox.......................... 160, 176
Power steering fluid, checking and toppingup............................................................. 227
Power sunroof........................................... 79
Power windows......................................... 73passenger seat..................................... 74
Programme type...................................... 260
PTY – Programme type........................... 260
Puncture, see Tyres......................... 199, 201
Putting calls on hold................................ 269
R
RadioEON.................................................... 261frequency update................................ 260
news................................................... 259programme types............................... 258radio settings...................................... 257radio stations...................................... 257REG.................................................... 260
Radio text................................................ 260
Rain sensor................................................ 66
Random, CD and audio files.................... 263
RDS functions.......................................... 258resetting.............................................. 261
Reading lamps, see Lighting................... 111
Rear seat.................................................. 118boarding............................................. 107
Rearview and door mirrorsautomatic retracting/extending...... 77, 82compass............................................... 75door...................................................... 77electrically retractable........................... 77interior................................................... 75
RecirculationA/C........................................................ 92ECC...................................................... 96
Recommended child seats ....................... 31
Reduced guardsettings................................................. 82
Refrigerant................................................. 90
Refuellingfuel cap............................................... 144fuel filler flap, electrical opening......... 144refuelling............................................. 144
Refusing a call......................................... 269
REG - Regional radio programmes......... 260
Relay/fuse box: see Fuses....................... 240
Remote control........................................ 126replacing the battery........................... 133
Remote control, HomeLink programmable ..................................... 84
Remote control key................................. 153battery replacement............................ 133detachable key blade......................... 127functions............................................. 126
Remote control key system, type appro-val............................................................ 302
Resetting the door mirrors......................... 77
Reverse gear inhibitor.............................. 157
Rimscleaning.............................................. 210
Roof load, max. weight ........................... 287
Rustproofing............................................ 215
12 Alphabetical Index
12
314
S
Safetysafety systems, table............................ 29
Safety net................................................. 122
ScanCD and audio files.............................. 263radio stations...................................... 258
Seatbeltpregnancy............................................. 17seatbelt guide....................................... 18seatbelt tensioner................................. 18
Seatbelt reminder...................................... 17
Seatbelts.................................................... 16
Seatshead restraints, rear............................ 118lowering the rear backrest.................. 118manual setting.................................... 106power seat.......................................... 106
Securing loads ........................................ 122
Service programme................................. 218
Side airbags............................................... 24
Side airbag SIPS........................................ 24
SIM card.................................................. 267
SIPS bags.................................................. 24
SMS......................................................... 272read..................................................... 272write.................................................... 272
Soot filter........................................... 54, 147
Soot filter full............................................ 147
Soundaudio settings............................. 252, 254audio source....................................... 252volume................................................ 252
Spare wheel............................................. 199temporary spare......................... 197, 199
Spin control............................................. 169
SRS systemgeneral.................................................. 20
Stability and traction control system....... 169
Stains....................................................... 211
Standby, phone....................................... 269
Start assistance....................................... 180
Starting the engine.................................. 152keyless drive............................... 130, 156
Steering lock............................................ 152
Steering wheelcruise control........................................ 68keypad.................................... 68, 70, 268steering wheel adjustment.................... 71
Stone chips and scratches...................... 214
Storage compartment.............................. 114CD discs............................................. 116
Storage spaces in the passenger compart-ment......................................................... 114
Storing stations, manual and automatic.. 257
Streaming audio...................................... 254
Subwoofer............................................... 254
Sunroof...................................................... 79opening and closing....................... 79, 80pinch protection.................................... 80sunscreen............................................. 80ventilation position................................ 79
Sunscreen, sunroof.................................... 80
Surround.......................................... 251, 255
Symbols................................................... 170indicator symbols........................... 51, 52warning symbols................................... 50
Symbols and display messagesparking heater..................................... 100
12 Alphabetical Index
12
315
T
Tailgatedriving with open tailgate................... 143locking/unlocking........................ 126, 134
Tank volume............................................ 292
Technical data, engine............................. 289
Temperatureactual temperature............................... 91passenger compartment, electronic cli-mate control.......................................... 97passenger compartment, manual cli-mate control.......................................... 94
Testing the alarm system......................... 138
TimerA/C........................................................ 93ECC...................................................... 96
Tools........................................................ 199
Total airing function................................. 135
Towbar, see Towing equipment.............. 183
Towing..................................................... 176towing eye.......................................... 178
Towing capacity....................................... 287
Towing equipment................................... 183installation........................................... 185
removing............................................. 187specifications...................................... 184
Towing eye.............................................. 178
TP – Traffic information............................ 259
Traffic information.................................... 259
Trailer....................................................... 181cable................................................... 183
Trip computer............................................ 63
Tuning Radio............................................ 257
Type approval, remote control key sys-tem........................................................... 302
Type designation..................................... 284
Tyresdirection of rotation............................ 197driving characteristics......................... 194general................................................ 194maintenance....................................... 194pressure...................................... 198, 298puncture repair................................... 203specifications...................................... 194speed ratings...................................... 194tread wear indicators.......................... 195winter tyres......................................... 197
U
Unlocking......................................... 131, 134settings................................................. 82
Upper mounting points, child seat............ 40
USB, connection...................................... 252
V
Ventilation.................................................. 91
Vibration damper..................................... 183
Volumeaudio system...................................... 252auto volume control............................ 255media player....................................... 252
W
Warning lampstability and traction control system. . 169
Warning symbol, airbag system................ 19
Warning triangle....................................... 199
Washer fluid, filling................................... 225
12 Alphabetical Index
12
316
Washersheadlamps............................................ 65rear window.......................................... 66washer fluid, filling.............................. 225windscreen........................................... 65
Waxing..................................................... 211
Weightskerb weight......................................... 287
Wheelschanging............................................. 201installation........................................... 202removal............................................... 201rims..................................................... 196snow chains........................................ 196spare wheel........................................ 199
Whiplash injury.......................................... 27
WHIPSchild seat/booster cushion................... 27whiplash injury...................................... 27
Windscreen wipers.................................... 65rain sensor............................................ 66
Winter tyres.............................................. 197
Wiperrear window.......................................... 66
Wiper blades............................................ 228cleaning.............................................. 228
replacing, rear window....................... 228replacing, windscreen......................... 228
���������������� ������������ ������������������������������������������� !����"�#$������©� !!!% !���&� '��"(��"��#��(����